Roland Musical Instrument KR105 User Guide

Owner’s Manual  
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “Important safety instructions”  
(p. 2), “Using the unit safely” (p. 3), and “Important notes” (p. 5). These sections provide  
important information concerning the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in order  
to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new  
unit, Owner’s Manual should be read in its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept  
on hand as a convenient reference  
202  
Copyright © 2005 ROLAND CORPORATION  
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without  
the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the unit safely  
The  
symbol alerts the user to important instructions  
Used for instructions intended to alert  
the user to the risk of death or severe  
injury should the unit be used  
improperly.  
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is  
determined by the design contained within the  
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for  
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.  
Used for instructions intended to alert  
the user to the risk of injury or material  
damage should the unit be used  
improperly.  
The  
symbol alerts the user to items that must never  
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that  
must not be done is indicated by the design contained  
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it  
means that the unit must never be disassembled.  
* Material damage refers to damage or  
other adverse effects caused with  
respect to the home and all its  
furnishings, as well to domestic  
animals or pets.  
The G symbol alerts the user to things that must be  
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is  
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In  
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-  
cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.  
001 Before using this unit, make sure to read the  
009 Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord,  
nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so can  
damage the cord, producing severed elements  
and short circuits. Damaged cords are fire and  
shock hazards!  
instructions below, and the Owner’s Manual.  
..........................................................................................................  
002a  
Do not open or perform any internal modifica-  
tions on the unit.  
..........................................................................................................  
010 This unit, either alone or in combination with an  
..........................................................................................................  
amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be  
capable of producing sound levels that could  
cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for  
a long period of time at a high volume level, or at  
a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience  
any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should  
immediately stop using the unit, and consult an  
audiologist.  
003 Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts  
within it (except when this manual provides  
specific instructions directing you to do so). Refer  
all servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland  
Service Center, or an authorized Roland  
distributor, as listed on the “Information” page.  
..........................................................................................................  
004 Never use or store the unit in places that are:  
..........................................................................................................  
011 Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable  
• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct  
sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating  
duct, on top of heat-generating equipment); or  
are  
material, coins, pins); or liquids of any kind  
(water, soft drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit.  
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors);  
or are  
..........................................................................................................  
012a  
Immediately turn the power off, remove the  
power cord from the outlet, and request servicing  
by your retailer, the nearest Roland Service  
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as  
listed on the “Information” page when:  
• Humid; or are  
• Exposed to rain; or are  
• Dusty; or are  
• Subject to high levels of vibration.  
..........................................................................................................  
• The power-supply cord, or the plug has been  
damaged; or  
007 Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is  
level and sure to remain stable. Never place it on  
stands that could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.  
• If smoke or unusual odor occurs  
• Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been  
spilled onto the unit; or  
..........................................................................................................  
008a  
The unit should be connected to a power supply  
only of the type described in the operating  
instructions, or as marked on the rear of unit.  
• The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise  
has become wet); or  
• The unit does not appear to operate normally  
or exhibits a marked change in performance.  
..........................................................................................................  
..........................................................................................................  
008e  
Use only the attached power-supply cord. Also,  
the supplied power cord must not be used with  
any other device.  
..........................................................................................................  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
106 Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on  
the unit.  
013 In households with small children, an adult  
..........................................................................................................  
should provide supervision until the child is  
capable of following all the rules essential for the  
safe operation of the unit.  
107b  
Never handle the power cord or its plugs with  
wet hands when plugging into, or unplugging  
from, an outlet or this unit.  
..........................................................................................................  
014 Protect the unit from strong impact.  
..........................................................................................................  
108d: Selection  
(Do not drop it!)  
If you need to move the instrument, take note of  
the precautions listed below. At least two persons  
are required to safely lift and move the unit. It  
should be handled carefully, all the while keeping  
it level. Make sure to have a firm grip, to protect  
yourself from injury and the instrument from  
damage.  
..........................................................................................................  
015 Do not force the units power-supply cord to  
share an outlet with an unreasonable number of  
other devices. Be especially careful when using  
extension cordsthe total power used by all  
devices you have connected to the extension  
cords outlet must never exceed the power rating  
(watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive  
loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat  
up and eventually melt through.  
1
Check to make sure the screw securing the unit  
to the stand have not become loose. Fasten  
them again securely whenever you notice any  
loosening.  
..........................................................................................................  
016 Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult  
2
3
Disconnect the power cord.  
with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service  
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as  
listed on the Informationpage.  
devices.  
4
5
7
..........................................................................................................  
019 DO NOT play a CD-ROM disc on a conventional  
Raise the adjusters on the stand (p. 17).  
Close the lid.  
audio CD player. The resulting sound may be of a  
level that could cause permanent hearing loss.  
Damage to speakers or other system components  
may result.  
Fold down the music rest.  
109a  
..........................................................................................................  
026 Do not put anything that contains water (e.g.,  
Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and  
unplug the power cord from the outlet (p. 16).  
flower vases) on this unit. Also, avoid the use of  
insecticides, perfumes, alcohol, nail polish, spray  
cans, etc., near the unit. Swiftly wipe away any  
liquid that spills on the unit using a dry, soft  
cloth.  
..........................................................................................................  
110a  
Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning  
in your area, pull the plug on the power cord out  
of the outlet.  
..........................................................................................................  
..........................................................................................................  
101a  
116 Be careful when opening/closing the lid so you  
The unit should be located so that its location or  
position does not interfere with its proper venti-  
lation.  
do not get your fingers pinched (p. 16). Adult  
supervision is recommended whenever small  
children use the unit.  
..........................................................................................................  
102b  
..........................................................................................................  
Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply  
cord when plugging into, or unplugging from, an  
outlet or this unit.  
118cAlways keep the following parts including with  
the KR105 and small components that may be  
removed out of the reach of small children to  
avoid accidental ingestion of these parts.  
..........................................................................................................  
103a  
At regular intervals, you should unplug the  
power plug and clean it by using a dry cloth to  
wipe all dust and other accumulations away from  
its prongs. Also, disconnect the power plug from  
the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain  
unused for an extended period of time. Any  
accumulation of dust between the power plug  
and the power outlet can result in poor insulation  
and lead to fire.  
Removable parts  
Screws fastening the stand  
Screws fastening music rest  
the thumbscrew fastening the headphone hook  
..........................................................................................................  
..........................................................................................................  
104 Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming  
entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be  
placed so they are out of the reach of children.  
..........................................................................................................  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important notes  
291b  
In addition to the items listed under Important safety instructions(p. 2) and Using the unit safely(p. 3), please read and  
observe the following:  
Power Supply  
Maintenance  
401b  
301 Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is being  
To clean the unit, use a dry, soft cloth; or one that is slightly  
dampened. Try to wipe the entire surface using an equal amount  
of strength, moving the cloth along with the grain of the wood.  
Rubbing too hard in the same area can damage the finish.  
used by an electrical appliance that is controlled by an inverter  
(such as a refrigerator, washing machine, microwave oven, or air  
conditioner), or that contains a motor. Depending on the way in  
which the electrical appliance is used, power supply noise may  
cause this unit to malfunction or may produce audible noise. If it  
is not practical to use a separate electrical outlet, connect a power  
supply noise filter between this unit and the electrical outlet.  
402 Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any kind, to  
avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or deformation.  
403 The pedals of this unit are made of brass.  
307 Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the power to  
all units. This will help prevent malfunctions and/or damage to  
speakers or other devices.  
Brass eventually darkens as the result of the natural oxidization  
process. If the brass becomes tarnished, polish it using commer-  
cially available metal polisher.  
308 Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the POWER  
switch is switched off, this does not mean that the unit has been  
completely disconnected from the source of power. If you need to  
turn off the power completely, first turn off the POWER switch,  
then unplug the power cord from the power outlet. For this  
reason, the outlet into which you choose to connect the power  
cords plug should be one that is within easy reach and readily  
accessible.  
Repairs and Data  
452 Please be aware that all data contained in the units memory may  
be lost when the unit is sent for repairs. Important data should  
always be backed up on floppy disk, or written down on paper  
(when possible). During repairs, due care is taken to avoid the  
loss of data. However, in certain cases (such as when circuitry  
related to memory itself is out of order), we regret that it may not  
be possible to restore the data, and Roland assumes no liability  
concerning such loss of data.  
Placement  
351 Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment  
containing large power transformers) may induce hum. To  
alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this unit; or move  
it farther away from the source of interference.  
Additional Precautions  
Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably  
lost as a result of a malfunction, or the improper operation of the  
unit. To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important  
data, we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of  
important data you have stored in the units memory.  
352a  
This device may interfere with radio and television reception. Do  
not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers.  
352b  
Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices, such  
as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of this unit. Such noise  
could occur when receiving or initiating a call, or while  
conversing. Should you experience such problems, you should  
relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance  
from this unit, or switch them off.  
552 Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents of  
data that was stored once it has been lost. Roland Corporation  
assumes no liability concerning such loss of data.  
553 Use a reasonable amount of care when using the units buttons,  
sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks and  
connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.  
354b  
Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near devices  
554 Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.  
that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed vehicle, or otherwise  
subject it to temperature extremes. Also, do not allow lighting  
devices that normally are used while their light source is very  
close to the unit (such as a piano light), or powerful spotlights to  
shine upon the same area of the unit for extended periods of time.  
Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit.  
556 When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the connector  
itselfnever pull on the cable. This way you will avoid causing  
shorts, or damage to the cables internal elements.  
557 A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during normal  
355b  
When moved from one location to another where the temper-  
operation.  
558a  
ature and/or humidity is very different, water droplets (conden-  
sation) may form inside the unit. Damage or malfunction may  
result if you attempt to use the unit in this condition. Therefore,  
before using the unit, you must allow it to stand for several  
hours, until the condensation has completely evaporated.  
To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the units volume  
at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use headphones, so you  
do not need to be concerned about those around you (especially  
when it is late at night).  
559b  
When you need to transport the unit, pack it in shock-absorbent  
356 Do not allow rubber, vinyl, or similar materials to remain on the  
unit for long periods of time. Such objects can discolor or  
otherwise harmfully affect the finish.  
358 Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard. This can  
be the cause of malfunction, such as keys ceasing to produce  
sound.  
359 Do not paste stickers, decals, or the like to this instrument.  
material. Transporting the unit without doing so can cause it to  
become scratched or damaged, and could lead to malfunction.  
560 Do not apply undue force to the music rest while it is in use.  
561 Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-7/5; sold separately).  
By connecting any other expression pedals, you risk causing  
malfunction and/or damage to the unit.  
Peeling such matter off the instrument may damage the exterior  
finish.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Handling CD-ROMs  
562 Use a cable from Roland to make the connection. If using some  
other make of connection cable, please note the following precau-  
tions.  
801 Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside (encoded  
Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use cables  
that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit. The use  
of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low,  
or impossible to hear. For information on cable specifications,  
contact the manufacturer of the cable.  
surface) of the disc. Damaged or dirty CD-ROM discs may not be  
read properly. Keep your discs clean using a commercially  
available CD cleaner.  
*
*
GS (  
) is a registered trademark of Roland Corpo-  
ration.  
565 Before opening or closing the keyboard lid, always make sure  
that no pets or other small animals are located on top of the  
instrument (in particular, they should be kept away from the  
keyboard and its lid). Otherwise, due to the structural design of  
this instrument, small pets or other animals could end up getting  
trapped inside it. If such a situation is encountered, you must  
immediately switch off the power and disconnect the power cord  
from the outlet. You should then consult with the retailer from  
whom the instrument was purchased, or contact the nearest  
Roland Service Center.  
XG lite (  
) is a registered trademark of Yamaha  
Corporation.  
*
207 Apple and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple  
Computer, Inc.  
*
220 All product names mentioned in this document are trade-  
marks or registered trademarks of their respective  
owners.  
Handling Floppy Disks  
(Using the Floppy Disk Drive)  
Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating of  
magnetic storage medium. Microscopic precision is required to  
enable storage of large amounts of data on such a small surface  
area. To preserve their integrity, please observe the following  
when handling floppy disks:  
Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk.  
Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty areas.  
Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes (e.g.,  
direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle). Recommended  
temperature range: 10 to 50˚C (50 to 122˚F).  
Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields, such as  
those generated by loudspeakers.  
652 Floppy disks have a write protecttab which can protect the  
disk from accidental erasure. It is recommended that the tab be  
kept in the PROTECT position, and moved to the WRITE position  
only when you wish to write new data onto the disk.  
Rear side of the disk  
WRITE  
(you can save data to the disk)  
Protect tab  
PROTECT (you cannot save data)  
The identification label should be firmly affixed to the disk.  
Should the label come loose while the disk is in the drive, it may  
be difficult to remove the disk.  
654 Store all disks in a safe place to avoid damaging them, and to  
protect them from dust, dirt, and other hazards. By using a dirty  
or dust-ridden disk, you risk damaging the disk, as well as  
causing the disk drive to malfunction.  
Disks containing performance data for this unit should always be  
locked (have their write protect tab slid to the Protectposition)  
before you insert them into the drive on some other unit (except  
the PR-300, or a product in the HP-G, HPi, MT, KR, or Atelier  
families), or into a computers drive. Otherwise (if the write  
protect tab remains in the Writeposition), when you perform  
any disk operations using the other devices disk drive (such as  
checking the contents of the disk, or loading data), you risk  
rendering the disk unreadable by this units disk drive.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Thank you, and congratulations on your choice of the Roland KR105 Intelligent Piano.  
Apart from allowing you to achieve authentic piano performances, the KR105 also features easy-to-  
use automatic accompaniment and numerous other useful functions. In order to enjoy reliable  
performance of your new instrument for many years to come, please take the time to read through this  
manual in its entirety.  
Main Features  
Piano Sounds with Rich Resonance and Wide-Ranging  
Expressiveness  
The stereo sampling piano sound generator realistically reproduces even the sound of the hammers  
striking the strings, producing the tones of a high-quality concert grand piano. Maximum polyphony  
of 64 notes ensures that you can use the pedal freely without running out of notes.  
Pursuing the Playing Feel of a Grand Piano  
The KR105 has a progressive hammer action keyboard, which duplicates the touch of a grand piano,  
with a heavier touch in the lower register, and a lighter touch in the upper register. The pedal is  
designed for good-feeling response, and allows subtle performance nuances to be expressed.  
In addition to the ability of adjusting the key weight, a Hammer Responsefunction, which  
reproduces the subtle action of the hammers, is also incorporated, so there are two key-touch controls  
that come into play when determining the precise character of the keyboard. Additionally, the  
instruments pedals are firm and responsive, lending your performances fuller and more detailed  
expressiveness.  
Accomplish Tasks Easily with the Main Buttons  
Almost all of the KR105s common functions, including playing back songs, displaying notations,  
running the automatic accompaniment, selecting tones, and so on can be accomplished using the Main  
buttons to the left of the screen.  
Easy-To-Use “Music Assistant” Automatic Accompaniment  
Feature  
You can select from an amazing 350 settings to get automatic accompaniment that perfectly matches  
the song you are playing.  
Each songs Music Assistant settings are shown in a manner that is easy to grasp, so playing along  
with the changes in the accompaniment is a snap.  
For easy enjoyment of Music Assistant, the KR105 also includes songs that you can perform while  
reading the chord charts.  
Touch screen  
The KR105 features a touch screen with rich graphics to make viewing easier. Operations can be  
carried out easily, just by touching the screen.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Introduction  
How To Use This Manual  
The KR105 Owners Manual consists of three volumes, Quick Start, Owners Manual, and the USB  
Install Guide.  
Please start out by reading Before You Start Playing(p. 15) in the Owners Manual (this volume).  
This explains how to connect the KR105s power cord and how to turn on the instruments power.  
After turning on the KR105s power, please continue by reading Quick Start.  
By trying out the various procedures while reading the Quick Start, you can easily learn how to play  
the KR105 and make use of its major functions (especially procedures that involve use of the main  
buttons).  
The Owners Manual describes procedures, from basic operation to procedures for special  
applications (for example, using the KR105 as an accompanist and creating songs), that will help you  
master the KR105s many performance functions.  
When connecting a computer to the USB port, be sure to read the USB Install Guide. This describes  
the procedure for installing the driver needed to connect via USB.  
*
For more on system requirements, refer to the “USB Installation Guide.”  
I Conventions Used in This Manual  
This manual uses the following conventions in the interest of simpler, more concise instructions.  
Button names are enclosed in square brackets [ ], as in One Touch Program [Piano]  
button.  
On screen text is enclosed in angled brackets < >, as in <Exit>.  
The act of lightly contacting the Touch Screen with your finger is called touching.”  
NOTE  
An asterisk (*) or a  
at the beginning of a paragraph indicates a note or precaution.  
These should not be ignored.  
(p. **) refers to pages within the manual.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modifying an Accompaniment .......................................... 46  
Using the unit safely ..................................3  
Main Features............................................................................ 7  
Adding Harmony to the Right-Hand Part (Melody  
Playing Sounds in the Left Hand (Lower Tone).............. 50  
Playing the Piano with Accompaniment Added (Piano  
Style Arranger)...................................................................... 51  
Rear Panel ................................................................................ 14  
Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Part (Balance).. 52  
Playing a Song....................................................................... 54  
Registering the Songs You Like (Favorites)...................... 59  
Match the Tempo Before You Begin Playing (Count In) 68  
Muting Some Parts Before Playing  
Setting Markers for Repeated Practice (Marker) ............. 70  
Transposing Keyboard Sounds and Songs Played Back  
Basic Screen.......................................................................... 19  
Using the Main Icons.......................................................... 19  
The Scroll Bar and The Page Icon ..................................... 19  
Recording Along with a Song............................................. 80  
Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing  
Deleting Saved Songs........................................................... 90  
Copying Songs on Disks to Favorites................................ 91  
Performing with a Variety of Tones (Tone Buttons)....... 21  
(Layer).................................................................................... 25  
Playing Different Tones with the Left and Right Hands  
Applying Effects to the Sound (Effects)............................ 30  
Using the Metronome.......................................................... 32  
2. Automatic Accompaniment......................... 35  
Loading Saved User Program Sets ................................... 95  
Music Styles and Automatic Accompaniment................. 35  
Performing Using Automatic Accompaniment (One-  
Touch Arranger)................................................................... 36  
Deleting Saved User Program Sets....................................... 96  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Memory .................................................................................... 96  
Coping Sets of User Programs Stored in the User Memory  
8. Creating Music Styles................................116  
Creating Original Styles (User Styles)................................ 116  
(Style Composer)............................................................... 116  
Creating a Style from a Song You Composed Yourself  
(Style Converter) ............................................................... 118  
Selecting the Pedal Used for Switching Settings  
Sequential Loading of User Program Sets (Load Next). 97  
Saving a User Style ............................................................... 121  
Deleting Saved User Styles.............................................. 122  
Simultaneously Switching User Program and Transmitting  
Copying Styles Saved in the User Memory to Disks ... 123  
Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer)99  
Getting the Most Suitable Part Tones for the Musical  
Genre (Tone Set)................................................................ 101  
Procedure ........................................................................... 124  
Changing the Keyboards Split Point (Split Point)....... 125  
Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads  
Changing How Chords Are Played and Specified  
Changing the Recording Method (Rec Mode).................. 102  
(Replace Recording).......................................................... 103  
(Mix Recording)................................................................. 103  
Recording).......................................................................... 104  
Recording).......................................................................... 105  
(Arranger Config).............................................................. 128  
Composing an Accompaniment By Entering Chords (Chord  
Lid: Adjusting the piano tone.......................................... 132  
Changing the Tuning (Tuning) ....................................... 133  
Exchanging Parts (Part Exchange).................................. 112  
Correcting Notes One by One (Note Edit) .................... 112  
(Hammer Response) ......................................................... 134  
Adjusting the Resonant Sounds (String Resonance).... 134  
Other Settings........................................................................ 135  
Changing the Screen Message When the Power Is  
Turning Off the Beat Indicator (Beat Indicator)............ 137  
Turned Off (Memory Backup)......................................... 138  
Restoring the Factory Settings (Factory Reset) ............. 138  
Changing the Tempo Within the Song .............................. 114  
Adjusting the Tempo While Listening to a Song ......... 114  
Adjusting the Tempo at a Particular Measure.............. 115  
Disabling Functions Other Than Piano Performance  
(Panel Lock) ........................................................................... 140  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
(Play Mode)........................................................................ 141  
Hiding the Lyrics (Lyrics)................................................ 141  
Changing the Parts Assigned to the Track Buttons During  
SMF Playback (Track Assign).......................................... 142  
Connecting Video Equipment (V-LINK)........................... 143  
Using the V-LINK function ............................................. 143  
Connecting MIDI Devices.................................................... 143  
Connectors ......................................................................... 143  
Synchronizing with Connected MIDI Devices................. 144  
Selecting the Transmit Channel (Tx Channel) .............. 146  
Keyboard (Local Control) ................................................ 146  
Bank Select MSB/Bank Select LSB) ................................ 147  
Connecting to Audio Equipment ....................................... 148  
Connectors ......................................................................... 148  
Making the Connections .................................................. 148  
Connecting a Computer....................................................... 149  
Connect to the MIDI Connectors .................................... 149  
Connect to the USB Connector........................................ 150  
About the KR105s Sound Generator............................. 168  
Index ........................................................171  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Panel Descriptions  
6
7
8
10  
11  
14  
17 18 19  
22  
2 3 4 5  
9
12  
13  
16  
20  
21  
15  
Power  
1
1. [Power] switch  
13.Fill In buttons ([To Variation], [To Original])  
Inserts a fill-in in an automatic accompaniment and  
changes the accompaniment pattern (p. 46).  
2. [Volume] knob  
14.Music Style buttons  
Adjusts the overall volume (p. 17).  
Select a Music Style for automatic accompaniment (p.  
39).  
Pressing the [User] button selects a User Style that  
youve made yourself or a Music Style on a floppy disk  
(p. 41).  
3. [Brilliance] knob  
Adjusts the brightness of the sound (p. 17).  
4. [Balance] knob  
Changes the volume balance for sounds played with the  
keyboard and for songs and accompaniments (p. 52).  
15.[Intro/Ending] button  
Play an intro or ending during automatic  
accompaniment (p. 43).  
5. [Mic Echo] knob  
Allows you to set the level of the echo effect that can be  
added to your singing (p. 30).  
16.[Start/Stop] button  
6. [Part Balance] button  
This adjusts the relative volume levels of each of the  
performance parts (p. 52).  
17.[Count/Marker] button  
These allow you to add and move markers in the  
notation as well as repeat playback of song segments  
simply and easily (p. 70).  
7. [Transpose] button  
Transposes the pitch of the keyboard or the song being  
played (p. 73).  
18.Beat Indicator  
8. [Reverb] button  
This lights up in correspondence with the beat of the  
selected song or accompaniment.  
Adds reverberation to the sound (p. 28).  
9. [User Program] button  
19.[Metronome] button  
Stores the selected functions and states of the buttons (p.  
93).  
Activates the built-in metronome (p. 32).  
20.Tempo [] [+] buttons  
Adjusts the tempo.  
Performance Pad  
Press the [] and [+] buttons at the same time to return to  
the original tempo.  
This is used to change the arrangement type for  
automatic accompaniment with the Performance Pads  
(p. 46).  
11.[User Function] button  
This is used to assign a variety of functions to the  
Performance Pads (p. 126).  
The operation of these buttons depends on the status  
and setting of buttons each is changed depending on the  
buttons numbered [10] and [11].  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Panel Descriptions  
23  
24  
26  
28  
29  
30  
32  
25  
27  
31  
21. Main Buttons  
Record/Playback  
[Song/File] button  
28.[Menu] button  
You can select functions for playing back, recording or  
floppy disk (p. 54).  
[DigiScore] button  
Displays notations (p. 61).  
[Music Assistant] button (p. 140)  
editing a song (p. 82, 99, 141).  
29.Track buttons  
Used to play back or record each track of a song (p. 69,  
81).  
30.Transport buttons  
22.Touch Screen  
[
(Reset)] button  
This lets you perform a variety of operations just by  
Resets the song playback-start location to the beginning  
of the song.  
touching the screen (p. 18).  
23.Dial  
[
(Play/Stop)] button  
(Rec)] button  
Use this to change on-screen values.  
[
24.Contrast knob  
When pressed, this button places the instrument in  
recording standby (p. 76, 99).  
Adjusts the contrast of the screen (p. 18).  
[Piano] button  
[
(Bwd)] button  
Rewinds the song.  
(Fwd)] button  
Makes the optimal settings for a piano performance (p.  
20).  
[Arranger] button  
Makes the optimal settings for playing with automatic  
accompaniment (p. 36).  
[
Fast-forwards the song.  
31.[Wonderland/Game] button  
Here you can learn about instruments while having fun.  
See the Quick Start  
26.[Tone] buttons  
32.Disk drive  
Select the Tones that will be played from the keyboard  
This is where you insert floppy disks with Standard  
MIDI Files or Music Styles you may already own. The  
drive accepts 2DD (720k) and 2HD (1.44MB) floppy  
disks.  
(p. 21).  
27.[Melody Intelligence] button  
Adds harmony to the sounds played with the keyboard  
(p. 49).  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Panel Descriptions  
Rear Panel  
fig.panelRear  
1
2
3
4
1. Expression pedal jack  
You can connect an expression pedal to the KR105 to  
control the volume.  
3. Input jacks  
generating device or an audio device, so that the sound  
of that device will be output from the KR105s speakers  
(p. 148).  
2. Pedal connector  
Connect the pedal cable of the stand to this connector (p.  
4. Output jacks  
15).  
enjoy more powerful sound. They can also be connected  
to a tape recorder or similar device in order to record  
your performance on a cassette tape (p. 148).  
Bottom Panel  
4. MIDI Out/In connectors  
These can be connected to an external MIDI device to  
exchange performance data (p. 143).  
5. USB connector  
You can connect a computer and exchange performance  
data between the instrument and the computer (p. 150).  
1
2
3
4
5
1. Phones jacks  
A set of headphones can be connected here (p. 17).  
2. Mic Volume knob  
3. Mic In jack  
Used for connecting microphones (p. 18).  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Before You Start Playing  
Connect the Pedal Cable  
Setting Up the Music Rest  
Set up the music rest as shown in the figure below.  
Insert the pedal cable into the Pedal connector on the  
rear panel of the KR105.  
fig.00-01  
Fold the three supporting feet at the back of the rest and  
check whether the stand is held in place.  
Connect the Power Cord  
Insert the included power cord into the AC inlet on the  
bottom panel of the KR105, and then plug it into an  
electrical outlet.  
NOTE  
Be sure to use the supplied power cord.  
fig.00-02  
Before moving the KR105, be sure to lower the music  
stand as a safety precaution.  
I Using the Music Holders  
You can use the holders to hold pages in place. When not  
using the holders, leave them folded down.  
fig.mu_stand4  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Before You Start Playing  
Opening/Closing the Lid  
945 If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the  
POWER switch, then unplug the power cord from the power  
outlet. Refer to Power Supply (p. 5).  
To open the lid, use both hands to lift it lightly, and  
slide it away from yourself.  
To close the lid, pull it gently toward yourself, and  
About the Pedals  
lower it softly after it has been fully extended.  
fig.00-05  
The pedals have the following functions, and are used  
mainly for piano performance.  
NOTE  
When opening and closing the lid, be careful not to let your fingers  
get caught. If small children will be using the KR105, adult  
supervision should be provided.  
Soft Pedal  
Damper Pedal  
Sostenuto Pedal  
NOTE  
If you need to move the piano, make sure the lid is closed first to  
prevent accidents.  
Damper pedal (right pedal)  
While this pedal is pressed, notes will be sustained even after  
you take your fingers off the keys.  
Turning the Power On and  
Off  
On an acoustic piano, holding down the damper pedal will  
allow the remaining strings to resonate in sympathy with the  
sounds that you played from the keyboard, adding a rich  
resonance.  
NOTE  
The KR105 simulates this damper resonance.  
Turn on power to your various devices in the order specified. By  
turning on devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction  
and/or damage to speakers and other devices.  
941  
You can change the amount of resonance applied with the damper  
pedal.  
To turn the power on, turn the [Volume] knob all the  
way down, and then press the [Power] switch.  
Sostenuto pedal (center pedal)  
The power will turn on, and the Power indicator at the  
left front of the KR105 will light.  
This pedal sustains only the sounds of the keys that were  
already played when you pressed the pedal.  
After a few seconds, you will be able to play the  
keyboard to produce sound.  
Soft pedal (left pedal)  
Use the [Volume] knob to adjust the volume.  
When you hold down this pedal and play the keyboard, the  
sound will have a softer tone.  
NOTE  
The softness of the sound changes subtly depending on the  
extent to which the pedal is depressed.  
This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval (a few  
seconds) after power up is required before the unit will operate  
normally.  
Power  
Power Indicator  
To turn the power off, turn the [Volume] knob all the  
way to the left, and press the [Power] switch.  
The Power indicator at the left front of the KR105 will go  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Before You Start Playing  
About the Adjuster  
Connecting Headphones  
When you move the KR105 or if you feel that the pedals are  
unstable, adjust the adjuster located below the pedals as  
follows.  
The KR105 has two jacks for plugging in headphones. This  
allows two people to listen through headphones  
simultaneously, making it very useful for lessons and when  
performing piano pieces for four hands. Additionally, this  
allows you to play without having to worry about bothering  
others around you, even at night.  
Rotate the adjuster to lower it so that it is in firm contact  
with the floor. If there is a gap between the pedals and  
the floor, the pedals may be damaged. In particular  
when placing the instrument on carpet, adjust this so  
that the pedals firmly contact the floor.  
Plug the headphones into the Phones jack located at the  
bottom left of the piano.  
Connecting headphones will automatically mute the  
sound from the internal speakers.  
The headphone volume is adjusted by the [Volume]  
Adjuster  
knob of the KR105.  
fig.00-04.e  
Adjusting the Sounds  
Volume and Brilliance  
Turn the [Volume] knob to adjust the overall volume.  
Phones jack x 2  
Turn the [Brilliance] knob to adjust the brightness of  
the sound.  
NOTE  
Use Stereo headphones.  
Some Notes on Using Headphones  
To prevent damage to the cord, handle the headphones  
only by the headset or the plug.  
Connecting the headphones when the volume of  
connected equipment is turned up may result in damage  
to the headphones. Lower the volume on the KR105  
before plugging in the headphones.  
Listening at excessively high volume levels will not only  
damage the headphones, but may also cause hearing  
loss. Use the headphones at a moderate volume level.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Before You Start Playing  
I Using the Headphone Hook  
About the Touch Screen  
The KR105 makes use of a touch screen.  
Whenever you are not using the headphones, you can hang them on  
the headphone hook at the lower left of the KR105.  
This lets you carry out a wide variety of actions just by  
touching the screen lightly.  
Attaching the Headphone Hook  
Press and twist the headphone hook included with the KR105 into  
the hole in the bottom of the KR105 (refer to the figure below).  
Turn the headphone hook thumbscrew to secure the headphone  
hook.  
NOTE  
The touch screen is operated by touching it lightly with your finger.  
Pressing hard, or using a hard object can damage the touch screen.  
Be careful not to press too hard, and be sure to use only your fingers  
to operate the touch screen.  
NOTE  
changes in the surrounding environment and over time. If this  
happens, follow the steps in Refer to Calibrating the Touch Screen  
(Touch Screen) (p. 139). to correct the pointer position.  
Thumbscrew  
NOTE  
Do not place items on the touch screen.  
Connecting a Microphone  
I Adjusting the Contrast of the  
You can connect a microphone into the Mic In jack, and enjoy  
karaoke with the KR105.  
fig.00-10  
Screen  
To adjust the contrast of the screen, turn the Contrast  
Mic In jack  
Mic Volume knob  
knob located at the right side of the screen.  
1. Connect a microphone (sold separately) to the Mic In  
jack on the lower-left area of the instrument.  
2. Rotate the [Mic Volume] knob on left side of the Mic In  
jack to adjust the volume level for the microphone.  
Some Notes on Using a Microphone  
Be careful of high volume levels when using microphone  
late at night or early in the morning.  
When connecting a microphone to the KR105, be sure to  
lower the volume. If the volume control is too high when  
the microphone is plugged in, noise may be produced by  
the speakers.  
Howling could be produced depending on the location  
of microphones relative to speakers. This can be  
remedied by:  
1. Changing the orientation of the microphone(s).  
2. Relocating microphone(s) at a greater distance from  
speakers.  
3. Lowering volume levels.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Before You Start Playing  
I Using the Main Icons  
Main Screens  
You can many other screens besides the Basic screen to do  
things. The on-screen graphics that appear three dimensional  
work like buttons. These are called Icons.”  
I Piano Screen  
Immediately after the power is turned on, the Piano screen  
like the one below is displayed. For details, refer to p. 20.  
The main icons you can use on these screens are as follows.  
Some screens consist on two or more pages.  
You can display the next page or the  
previous page of the screen by touching  
these icons.  
When you select an internal song or music  
files that includes lyrics data, this icon  
appears in the Piano screen or Basic screen.  
Touch this to display the lyrics.  
NOTE  
The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict  
what should typically be shown by the display. Note, however, that  
your unit may incorporate a newer, enhanced version of the system  
(e.g., includes newer sounds), so what you actually see in the display  
I Basic Screen  
The following screen is called Basic screen.  
may not always match what appears in the manual.  
985  
Song name or Music  
Style name  
Beat  
Tempo  
Measure  
I The Scroll Bar and The Page  
The names of the selected Tones  
are displayed.  
Icon  
The Song and Tone selection screens feature a scroll bar at  
the right of the screen list, with page icons at the top and  
bottom of the scroll bar.  
This information is displayed  
when you use the automatic  
accompaniment.  
You can usually display this screen by pressing the <Exit>  
field several times.  
Follow either of the procedures described below to display it.  
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.  
The Basic screen appears and the settings are made for  
automatic accompaniment.  
Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button, one of the  
Tone buttons, then the <Exit> field.  
Touch the scroll bar and drag up and down to scroll through  
the list.  
Touch the page icons to change pages.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
1. Performance  
Playing the KR105 Like a Piano  
(One-Touch Piano)  
You can create the optimal settings for a piano performance with the press of a single  
button.  
fig.panel1-1  
1.  
Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.  
Since this instrument faithfully  
reproduces real acoustic piano  
action and response, keys  
played in the top one-and-one-  
half-octave range continue to  
resonate, regardless of the  
tone in this range is audibly  
different. The Key Transpose  
setting (p. 73) can also be used  
to change the range that is  
unaffected by the damper  
pedal.  
A Piano screen like the one shown below will appear.  
fig.d-piano.eps_60  
following settings, regardless of the current panel settings.  
keyboard returns to a single section.  
The pedals return to their usual functions (p. 16).  
The Grand Piano sound is automatically selected.  
The effect is automatically set to Damper Resonance(p. 30).  
When you select an internal  
song or music file that includes  
the lyrics data,  
appears  
in the Piano screen or Basic  
screen. Touch this to display  
the lyrics.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Performing with a Variety of Tones  
(Tone Buttons)  
For more about the names of  
Tones, take a look at the Tone  
List(p. 156).  
The KR105 comes with a many built-in instrument sounds and effects. This lets you  
enjoy perform in a wide range of musical styles.  
The built-in sounds are called Tones.The sounds are organized into six tone  
groups, which are assigned to the Tone buttons.  
fig.panel1-2  
1.  
Press any one of the Tone buttons to select a tone group.  
Youll see that buttons indicator light up.  
The screen displays the tone names included in the tone group youve selected.  
fig.d-tonesel.eps_60  
This screen is called the Tone selection screen.”  
Tones indicated by  
recommended.  
is called EX voices.These voices are especially  
What Key Off Sounddoes is recreate the tonal changes produced when the fingers  
are released from the keys.  
Tones indicated by GSare GS tones.  
Touch and drag up and down in the scroll bar to scroll through the screen and  
display other tones.  
Touch the page icons <  
> <  
> to change pages.  
You can touch <Audition> for a demonstration of a particular tone.  
You can touch <Effects> to add effect sounds to a variety of tones (p. 30).  
You can touch <Search> to find tones according to the search criteria you specify (p.  
24).  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2.  
3.  
Touch a tone name to select the tone.  
Youll hear the tone youve selected when you play the keyboard.  
You can use the dial to scroll through the screen as you switch the Tones to be  
played.  
Touch <Exit>.  
This returns you to the Basic screen or the previous screen.  
I Playing Percussion Instruments or Sound Effects  
You can use the keyboard to play percussion sounds or effects like sirens and animal  
sounds.  
fig.panel1-2  
1.  
2.  
Press the [Voice/Super Tones] button and watch the indicator light up.  
Touch <Super Tones> in the display.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3.  
Touch <Drums> or <SFX> to display the “Drums” or the “SOUND  
EFFECT” screen.  
fig.d-drum.eps_60  
Each note of the keyboard will play a different sound. You can also play sounds by  
touching the screen.  
The combination of sounds  
set. Take a look at the Drum  
Set List(p. 158) and SFX Set  
List(p. 162).  
You can select other drum tones by pressing the <  
> or <  
> buttons.  
4.  
Touch <Exit> several times.  
This returns you to the Basic screen or the previous screen.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
I Using Keywords to Search for Tones (Tone Search)  
You can search for tones that match the conditions you set for instrument or musical  
style. You can also search the tones using the first character of the tone name.  
1.  
2.  
Press any Tone button.  
The tone selection screen appears.  
Touch <Search>.  
The following Tone Searchscreen appears.  
fig.d-tonesrch1.eps_60  
Condition Search screen  
Name Search screen  
Touch here to switch these screens.  
Searching by Conditions  
3.  
4.  
Touch <Category> or <Genre>, then use the dial to select the search  
In condition search, tones  
satisfying all of the selected  
search criteria are sought.  
conditions.  
Touch <Search>.  
The search results appear in the display.  
Touch the tone name to select the tone.  
Touch button to return to the tone search screen.  
Searching by Tone Name  
3
Touch <By Name>.  
Touch <By Key> to go to the condition search screen.  
4.  
Decide which character is to be used for the search.  
The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.  
Enter the character youre searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in succession  
cycles you through the available choices in that character group (ABC...).  
Touching <A-0> selects the type of character. Each time you touch <A-0>, the  
character switches between alphabets and numerals.  
5.  
Touch <Search>.  
The search results appear in the display.  
Touch the tone name to select the Tone.  
Touch <Exit> several times to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Performing with Multiple Sounds  
Layered Together (Layer)  
Two tones sounding together when you press a single key is referred to as a layer  
performance.”  
For instance, its possible to play the Tones for both Piano and Strings simultaneously.  
fig.layer.e  
Grand Piano 1  
Strings 1  
When you select an internal  
song or music file that includes  
the lyrics data,  
in the Basic screen. Touch this  
to display the lyrics.  
appears  
1.  
Touch <Layer 1>.  
fig.d-layer.eps_60  
The tone that was sounding before you switched to layer performance, plus the tone  
indicated in the lower part of the display, are now played together.  
When you touch Octave  
<-><+> on the tone selection  
see Shifting the Keyboard  
Pitch in Octave Steps (Octave  
Shift)(p. 27).  
Here, the tone appearing in the upper part of the display is called the Upper tone,”  
and the tone appearing in the lower part of the display is called the Layer tone.”  
Changing the Tones  
2.  
Touch the name of the tone to be changed.  
Touch here to highlight the tone name.  
3.  
4.  
Press a Tone button to select the new tone (p. 21).  
the right-hand and Layer Tone  
Adjusting the Volume  
Balance for Each Performance  
Part (Part Balance)(p. 52).  
When you have selected the tone, touch <Exit>.  
The display returns to the Basic screen.  
Cancelling the Layer  
5.  
Touch <Layer>.  
The <Layer> icons is dimmed, and the Layer performance is cancelled.  
Now when you play the keys, only the tone indicated on the screen is sounded.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Playing Different Tones with the Left  
and Right Hands (Split)  
Dividing the keyboard into right-hand and left-hand areas, then playing different  
sounds in each section is called split performance.The boundary key is called the  
split point.”  
The split point key is included in the left-hand keyboard area. Each time power to  
refer to Changing the  
Keyboards Split Point (Split  
Point)(p. 125).  
the keyboard is turned on, the split point is reset to F#3.”  
fig.split.e  
Split Point  
Acoustic Bass  
Grand Piano  
When you select an internal  
song or music file that includes  
1.  
At the Basic screen, touch <Split>.  
the lyrics data,  
appears  
fig.d-split.eps_60  
in the Basic screen. Touch this  
to display the lyrics.  
The tone sounding prior to the split performance is played in the right-hand section  
of the keyboard, and the tone indicated at the left of the screen is played in the left-  
hand section of the keyboard.  
When you touch Octave  
<-> <+> in the tone selection  
Here, the tone appearing at the right part of the display is called the Upper tone,”  
and the tone appearing at the left part of the display is called the Lower tone.”  
see Shifting the Keyboard  
Pitch in Octave Steps (Octave  
Shift)(p. 27).  
Changing the Tones  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Touch the name of the tone to be changed.  
Press a Tone button to select the tone (p. 21).  
When you have selected the tone, touch <Exit>.  
The display returns to the Basic screen.  
refer to Adjusting the Volume  
Balance for Each Performance  
Part (Part Balance)(p. 52).  
Cancelling the Split  
5.  
Touch <Split>.  
The <Split> icon is dimmed, and the Split performance is cancelled.  
When you play the keys, only the tone indicated on the screen is sounded.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Layer and Split Performance Simultaneously  
Turning on either Layer Performance or Split Performance allows you to divide the  
keyboard into a upper and a lower part and play with two Tones layered in the  
When the keyboard has been  
divided into Upper and Lower  
sections, the damper pedal  
only affects the Upper section.  
of the Lower section, see  
Pedals and Performance Pads  
(Pedal Setting/User  
upper part.  
fig.d-layersplit.eps_60  
Functions)(p. 126).  
(Octave Shift)  
When using Layer performance (p. 25) or Split performance (p. 26), you can change  
the pitch of the keyboards sound in octave units. This function is called Octave  
Shift.”  
For example, when using a Layer performance, you can change the pitch of either.  
You can make the pitch of the keyboards Lower part match the pitch of the Upper  
part during split performance.  
1.  
On the Basic screen, touch <Layer> or <Split>.  
The KR105 switches to Layer performance or Split performance.  
2.  
3.  
To apply Octave Shift, touch the name of the tone you’ve selected.  
Press the Tone button to display the Tone selection screen.  
fig.d-octshift.eps_60  
4.  
Touch Octave <–> or <+> in the lower part of the screen to adjust the  
pitch of the sound.  
Each time you touch <+>, the pitch is raised one octave.  
Each time you touch <>, the pitch is lowered one octave.  
The sound can be changed from two octaves lower than the original sound (2) to  
two octaves above the original (+2).  
Touch <Exit> to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Adding Reverberation to the Sound (Reverb)  
Apply a reverb effect to the notes you play with the KR105.  
Reverb makes it sound as if you are playing in a concert hall.  
fig.panel1-3  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Press the [Reverb] button and watch the its indicator light up.  
A Reverbscreen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.d-reverb.eps_60  
Touch an icon to select the performance space.  
Display  
GS Room 1  
GS Room 2  
GS Room 3  
GS Hall 1  
Explanation  
Reproduces an indoor-type reverb.  
Provides a clear, expansive reverberation.  
Reproduces the reverberation found in a hall. Gives reverberation  
with a greater sense of depth than GS Room.  
GS Hall 2  
Reproduces a plate echo (reverberation created using the vibrations  
of a metal plate).  
GS Plate  
GS Delay  
A delayed sound that is added to the original, similar to the reflected  
sounds of mountain echoes.  
GS Pan Delay The reflected sounds are panned (shifted) laterally.  
No effect is applied when the  
slider is moved all the way to  
the left. In this case, the  
buttons indicator wont light  
up when you press the  
Touch the slider beneath the icons to adjust the effect selected.  
Touch and slide the knob on the screen to the right for a deeper reverb, and to the  
[Reverb] button.  
left for less.  
You can also move the slider with the dial.  
When you touch <Exit>, the reverb effect is activated, and you return to the previous  
screen.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Cancelling the Effect  
Press the [Reverb] button, and watch the indicator light go out.  
4.  
The reverb effect is eliminated.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Applying Effects to the Sound (Effects)  
keyboard.  
For more on the effect types,  
refer to the Effects List(p.  
163).  
1.  
First, press a Tone button to select a Tone (p. 21).  
The Tone selection screen appears.  
2.  
Then, touch <Effects>.  
The Effectsscreen appears.  
fig.d-effects.eps_60  
NOTE  
Applying Effects to the Sound  
You may find effects not being  
applied to certain parts when  
different effects are applied to  
the Upper tone, Layer tone,  
and Lower tone. In such  
3.  
Touch <ON>.  
The effect selected with <Type> will be applied.  
instances, you can select which  
effect is to have priority.  
Selecting the Type of Effect  
4.  
5.  
Touch <Type  
> to select the type of effect.  
Touch <Depth>  
to adjust the amount of effect applied.  
The amount increases as the value is raised.  
You can also move the slider with the dial.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Cancelling the Effect  
6.  
7.  
On the “Effects” screen, touch <OFF> to switch off the effect.  
Touch <Exit> to return to the Tone selection screen.  
All [Voice] button tones with a  
GSor qlogo appearing  
after the tone name have the  
same effect applied to them. If  
the effect for one of the tones  
with the GSor qlogo is  
changed, then the effects for the  
other tones with the GSor  
qlogo are also changed  
automatically.  
About the Effect Settings  
When the effects is set to ON, the appropriate effect is applied for the currently  
selected sound. You can also apply different effect types to each tone (except GS tones  
and tones with the qlogo). Although turning off the power returns effects to their  
initial settings, carrying out Memory Backup (p. 138) allows you to save and store the  
settings even after the power is turned off.  
I Enjoying Karaoke Performances with Music Files  
Commercial music files  
designed for karaokesing-  
when purchasing music files.  
Refer to Music Files That the  
KR105 Can Use(p. 168).  
1.  
2.  
Connect a microphone.  
Adjust the volume level.  
3.  
Select a song.  
For instructions on how to select songs, refer to Playing a Song(p. 54).  
4.  
5.  
Adjust the tempo as required with the Tempo [-] [+] buttons.  
If necessary, change the key of the song (Transpose: p. 73).  
You can stop lyrics from being  
displayed. Refer to Hiding  
the Lyrics (Lyrics)(p. 141).  
When you press the [  
(Play/Stop)] button, the accompaniment starts playing.  
Sing along with the accompaniment.  
When you play back a Music File with lyrics, the lyrics appear on screen.  
6.  
Press the [  
(Play/Stop)] button to stop the accompaniment.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Metronome  
During playback of a song, or  
when performing with  
automatic accompaniment, the  
sound of the metronome keeps  
time with the beat of the song  
or accompaniment.  
The KR105 features a built-in metronome. During playback of the song and  
accompaniment, the metronome plays at that tempo and beat.  
fig.panel1-6  
I Using the Metronome  
1.  
Press the [Metronome] button and watch the indicator light up.  
You will hear the metronome.  
The following Metronome screenappears.  
fig.d-metro.eps_60  
You can touch <Exit> to have the metronome continue to play while you return to  
the previous screen.  
Stopping the Metronome  
2.  
Press the [Metronome] button once more, and the indicator light goes  
out.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
I Changing the Metronome Settings  
Adjusting the Tempo  
You can adjust the tempo of the metronome. The tempo of the metronome changes  
automatically if you use an automatic accompaniment or play back a song.  
1.  
Press the Tempo [-] or [+] buttons to adjust a tempo.  
You can adjust the metronome tempo over a range of q= 10500.  
Pressing the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously returns the selected song  
accompaniment to the basic tempo.  
Changing the Beat of the Metronome  
1.  
2.  
On the Metronome screen, touch <Beat>.  
Select the beat with the dial.  
When  
the upbeat will sound.  
is selected, only  
Changing the Volume  
The volume of the metronome can be adjusted to ten different levels.  
1.  
2.  
On the Metronome screen, touch <Volume>.  
Set the volume with the dial.  
Choosing  
highest level.  
sets the volume to the lowest level, and choosing  
to silence the metronome sound.  
sets it to the  
Choose  
You can change the sound the metronome makes.  
The Normal sound(see below) is selected when the KR105 is powered up.  
1.  
2.  
On the Metronome screen, touch <Sound>.  
Select the sound with the dial.  
Displayed  
Explanation  
Normal sound  
Displayed  
Explanation  
Electronic sound  
1, 2, 3in Japanese  
1, 2, 3in English  
Dog and cat sounds  
Wood block  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Displayed  
Explanation  
Displayed  
Explanation  
Triangle and castanet  
Hand clap  
Changing How the Metronome Beat (Pattern) Sounds  
You can set the metronome to play at even smaller intervals.  
1.  
2.  
On the Metronome screen, touch <Pattern>.  
Select the pattern with the dial.  
Displayed  
Explanation  
Usual sound  
Displayed  
Explanation  
Dotted half-note intervals  
Dotted quarter-note  
intervals  
Half-note intervals  
Dotted eighth-note  
intervals  
Quarter-note intervals  
Eighth-note intervals  
Single back beat added  
Shuffle rhythm added  
Sixteenth-note intervals  
Triplet rhythm added  
Turning Off the Beat Light (Beat Indicator)  
The beat light flashes in time with the metronome, accompaniment Styles, and song  
tempos, but you can set it so that it stays off at all times.  
1.  
2.  
Touch <Beat LED> in the Metronome screen.  
Select OFF (Beat Indicator off) with the dial.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Automatic Accompaniment  
Music Styles and Automatic Accompaniment  
What is automatic accompaniment?  
automatic accompaniment,  
refer to Selecting Music Styles  
(Music Style Buttons)(p. 39).  
Automatic accompaniment is a function that provides you with accompaniment in  
a variety of musical genres, just by specifying chords in the left hand. Automatic  
accompaniment lets you play with an orchestra, even when performing alone! Press  
the One Touch Program [Arranger] to recall optimum settings for this function.  
What Are Music Styles?  
Accompaniment patterns in various musical genres are called Music Styles.”  
There are many different kinds of music around the world, and each has its own  
unique features. What gives jazz or classical music their unmistakable sounds are a  
unique combination of elements like instrumentation, melody, and phrasing, which  
interact to create the musical character.  
Elements of Music Styles  
A Music Style consists of a set of six patterns called divisions.”  
Division  
Intro  
Explanation  
Played at the start of a song.  
Original  
The basic accompaniment pattern.  
Variation  
This is a variation on the Original accompaniment pattern.  
This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a point where the  
mood changes and the accompaniment returns to the original.  
Fill In To Original  
This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a point where the  
mood changes and the accompaniment moves ahead to the  
variation.  
Fill In To  
Variation  
Ending  
The conclusion of a song.  
In addition, Music Styles may contain some or all of the following partsfff:  
Rhythm,” “Bass,” “Accompaniment 1,” “Accompaniment 2,” “Accompaniment 3,”  
Accompaniment 4,” “Accompaniment 5,and Accompaniment 6.”  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Performing Using Automatic Accompaniment  
(One-Touch Arranger)  
Heres how to create the settings for Automatic Accompaniment.  
fig.panel2-1  
1.  
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.  
The Basic screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.d-arrbasic.eps_60  
<
> appears in the Piano  
screen or Basic screen when  
headphones are connected..  
Normally, when you change a  
Music Style, the tempo and  
tone change to selections that  
to change the tempo and tone,  
refer to Changing Music  
Styles Without Changing the  
Tone or Tempo (One Touch  
Setting)(p. 125).  
Observe the settings:  
The keyboard is split into left- and right-hand parts, with accompaniment  
chords specified for the left-hand side of the keyboard.  
A tone appropriate for the selected Music Style is chosen.  
The tempo and beat for the selected Music Style is set.  
2.  
3.  
Play a chord on the Lower-part of keyboard.  
Music Styles, refer to  
Selecting Music Styles (Music  
Style Buttons)(p. 39).  
The accompaniment begins, starting from the intro.  
Play chords with the left hand, and the melody with the right.  
When you change chords in the left hand, the accompaniment also changes.  
fig.arr-split.e  
Split Point (F#3)  
accompaniment, refer to  
Starting and Stopping the  
Accompaniment(p. 43).  
Range where you can specify a chord  
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.  
Please refer to Changing the  
Keyboards Split Point (Split  
Point)(p. 125).  
After the ending plays, the accompaniment stops.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
I About Chords  
A chord is produced when several notes are played simultaneously. Chords are  
indicated by the pitch of the fundamental note of the chord (the root) and the chord  
type, which is determined by the other notes of the chord.  
For example, the C m chord is expressed in terms of the root note Cand the chord  
type m(minor). C m is made up of the three notes C,” “Eband G.”  
C mis indicated as the chord name on the Basic screen.  
fig.chord.e  
Cm  
E
Chord Type  
Root Note  
C
G
Root Note  
All chord roots are indicated as a letter, sometimes with # or b added, and correspond  
to the notes shown below.  
fig.chord-root.e  
Normally, settings used for the  
Chord Intelligence function are  
selected, but there may be  
settings that are not used. You  
see Changing How Chords  
Are Played and Specified  
I Playing Chords with Simple Fingering  
(Chord Intelligence)  
Chord Intelligenceis a feature that chooses the accompaniment chords the  
moment you play a key.  
To play a Cchord, for example, you normally have to play the three keys C, E, and  
G. But with Chord Intelligence, you only have to press the C key to start a Cchord  
(Arranger Config)(p. 128).  
accompaniment.  
fig.chord-intel.e  
Intelligence 1  
Major  
Minor  
C
C m  
Play the chord root.  
Play the root and the third key  
above it.  
For more information about  
chord fingering, refer to the  
Chord List(p. 164).  
Seventh  
C 7  
Minor Seventh  
C m7  
Play the root and the second key  
below it.  
Play the root, the third key above  
it, and the second key below it.  
Major Seventh  
Diminished  
C maj 7  
C dim  
Play the root and the first key  
below it.  
Play the root and the sixth key  
above it.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
I Viewing Chord Fingerings (Chord Finder)  
Whenever you are not sure how a certain chord is fingered, you can display the notes  
of the chord on the screen.  
1.  
On the Basic screen, touch <  
>.  
fig.d-arrbasic.eps_60  
2.  
Touch the root of the chord you want to learn about.  
The chord fingering appears on screen.  
fig.d-crdfind.eps_60  
For example, if you wanted to see the fingering for a C# chord, you would touch <C>,  
then touch <#>.  
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Basic screen.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting Music Styles (Music Style Buttons)  
You can select a variety of different Music Styles by pressing the Music Style buttons.  
Four different preset styles are assigned to the Music Style.  
fig.panel2-2  
1.  
2.  
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.  
For more on the Music Style  
names, refer to the separate  
Music Style List.  
Press one of the Music Style buttons to select the Music Style group.  
Watch the indicator button light up.  
Five of the Music Styles included in that group are displayed on the screen.  
fig.d-stylesel.eps_60  
This screen is called the Style Selection screen.”  
Touch and drag up and down in the scroll bar to scroll through the screen and  
display other styles.  
Touch the page icons <  
> <  
> to change pages.  
You can touch <Search> to find Styles that match the selected criteria (p. 40).  
3.  
4.  
Touch a Music Style name to select the Music Style.  
You can use the dial to automatically switch pages and select Styles.  
Touch Preset <A>, <B>, <C>, or <D> in the lower part of the screen.  
When the Music Style is selected, Preset A is selected.  
When any of the Presets from <A> through <D> are selected, the Music Style tempo,  
Upper Tone, Style Orchestrator settings (p. 48) and other settings change.  
5.  
Touch <Exit>.  
The display returns to the Basic screen.  
When you play a chord in the left-hand part of the keyboard, the selected Music Style  
is automatic.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
I Using Keywords to Search for Music Styles  
(Style Search)  
You can search for Music Styles that match the tempo of the song, musical genre, or  
other criteria you set.  
Only the KR105s internal  
Music Styles are searchable.  
You can also search Music Styles using the first character of the Style names.  
1.  
2.  
Press one of the Music Style buttons.  
Touch <Search>.  
The following Style Search screenappears.  
fig.d-stylsrch1.eps_60  
Condition Search screen  
Name Search screen  
Touch here to switch these screens.  
In a condition search, the  
KR105 looks for Music Styles  
satisfying all of the selected  
search criteria.  
Searching by Conditions  
3.  
4.  
Touch the parameter you want to set, then use the dial to select the search  
conditions.  
Touch <Search>.  
The search results appear in the display.  
Touch a Music Style name to select a Music Style.  
Touch <Exit> to return to the Style Search screen.  
Searching by Music Style Name  
3.  
4.  
Touch <By Name>.  
Touch <By Key> to return to the Condition Search screen.  
Decide which character you’ll use for the search.  
The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.  
Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in  
succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group  
(ABC...).  
Touch <A-0> to toggle between alphabets and numerals.  
5.  
Touch <Search>.  
The search results appear on the display.  
Touch a Music Style name to select a Music Style.  
Touch <Exit> several times to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
I Selecting Music Styles on Disks  
You can play other User Styles saved to floppy disks or User memory (p. 121).  
fig.panel2-3  
1.  
2.  
Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive (p. 85).  
If youre using the disk drive  
for the first time, be sure to  
read Important notes(p. 5).  
Press the Music Style [User] button.  
fig.d-styldisk.eps_60  
When you select Useror Diskusing the arrows next to the Mediafield, the  
screen for selecting user memory or disk Styles appears.  
When you touch <Preset>, the screen for selecting Trad/KidsMusic Styles  
appears.  
3.  
Select “Disk” using the “Media” arrow fdields.  
The Music Styles saved on the disk are displayed.  
When you select MediaUser, the Music Styles stored in User memory are  
displayed.  
4.  
5.  
Select a Music Style, and touch the Music Style name.  
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.  
Styles to user memory. Take a  
look at Saving a User Style”  
(p. 121).  
You can now perform in the selected Music Style.  
Music Styles selected from floppy disks are stored until the power is turned off. Even  
after ejecting the floppy disk, by pressing the Music Style [User] button, you can  
perform using the most recently selected Music Style.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Playing Only Music Style Rhythm Patterns  
You can also play only the rhythm patterns of Music Styles.  
1.  
2.  
Select a Music Style (p. 39).  
NOTE  
Some Music Styles do not  
include rhythm patterns.  
When you select these Style  
patterns, no rhythm patterns  
are played, even when you  
play on the left side of the  
keyboard.  
Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.  
The performance is set so that only the rhythm patterns are played.  
3.  
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.  
The Rhythm part of accompaniment begins, starting from the Intro.  
Just as with regular Automatic Accompaniment, you can add intros and endings by  
pressing the [Intro/Ending] button, and make changes to the rhythm patterns with  
the Fill In button (p. 46).  
Adjusting the Accompaniment Tempo  
fig.panel2-5  
When the Basic screen is displayed, you can use the Tempo [-] [+] buttons or the dial  
to change the tempo.  
The tempo is indicated on the upper left of the screen.  
fig.d-arrbasic.eps_60  
Pressing the Tempo [-] [+] buttons simultaneously returns the selected Music Style  
or song to the basic tempo.  
You can change the tempo of Automatic Accompaniment even while the  
accompaniment is playing.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Starting and Stopping the Accompaniment  
Pressing the One Touch Program [Arranger] button activates Sync Start for the  
accompaniment (which starts the accompaniment simultaneously when you play on  
the lower section of the keyboard), and automatically sets an appropriate intro for  
the accompaniment. You can also change the way the accompaniment starts and  
stops.  
I Having the Accompaniment Start Simultaneously  
When You Play the Keyboard (Sync)  
1.  
Press the [Intro/Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button simultaneously,  
causing the indicators of both buttons to flash.  
The Sync Start settings go into effect.  
Sync Start is set immediately  
after the One Touch Program  
[Arranger] button is pressed.  
2.  
Play a chord on the lower-part of keyboard.  
As you play the keys, the intro and accompaniment begins simultaneously.  
Changing the intro  
When set for Sync Start (the indicators of both the [Intro/Ending] button and [Start/  
Stop] button are flashing), you can use the following procedure to change the intro,  
or prevent the intro from playing.  
Starting without an intro  
Press the [Intro/Ending] button and watch the indicator go out.  
Now when you play a chord with the keyboard, the accompaniment starts without  
the intro.  
To start with a short intro added  
On the Basic screen, touch <Arranger> to select the following page:  
<1>: Normal intro  
<2>: Short Intro  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Select the Intro/Ending Type <2>.  
Now when you specify a chord with the keyboard, a short intro is played, and the  
accompaniment starts.  
Starting at the press of a button  
1.  
Press the [Intro/Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button simultaneously,  
and the indicators lights go out.  
The Sync Start function is cancelled.  
2.  
3.  
Play a chord on the lower part of keyboard.  
Choose the chord to be played when the accompaniment begins playing.  
Press the [Intro/Ending] button or the [Start/Stop] button.  
When you press the [Intro/Ending] button, the intro plays, and the accompaniment  
starts. When you press the [Start/Stop] button, the accompaniment starts without  
the intro.  
the chord tone and bass tone.  
Chords Are Played and  
Specified (Arranger Config)”  
(p. 128).  
Chord Tones and Bass Tones  
When you play the keys in the left-hand side of the keyboard while the [Start/Stop]  
buttons indicator is not lit, chords play. This note is called the Chord Tone,and  
the root of the chord being played at the same time is called the Bass Tone.”  
I Stopping Automatic Accompaniment  
Stopping with an Added Ending  
1.  
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.  
An ending plays and the Automatic Accompaniment stops.  
To stop with a short Ending  
On the Basic screen, touch <Arranger> to select the following page:  
<1>: Normal Ending  
<2>: Short Ending  
Select the Intro/Ending Type <2>.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Now a short Ending is played, and the accompaniment stops.  
Stopping at the Same Time the Button is Pressed  
1.  
Press the [Start/Stop] button.  
The Automatic Accompaniment stops as soon as you press the button.  
I Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the  
Intro (Countdown)  
If an intro plays before your performance, you can have a count-in sound played to  
the end of the intro, helping you hear when to start playing.  
fig.countdown.e  
Ex: 4/4  
When the Intro has finished playing, the  
accompaniment plays.  
Intro  
1
2
3
4
Count Sound  
1.  
2.  
Press the [Count/Marker] button and watch the indicator light up.  
The following Countdown settings screenappears.  
fig.d-cntdwn.eps_60  
Touch <Count Mode>  
In/Down.”  
to set this to “Count Down” or “Count  
When you press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button, the performance starts,  
and the countdown sound plays at the end of the intro.  
Countdown screen, refer to  
Changing the Settings for the  
Count(p. 131).  
Cancelling the Countdown  
Press the [Count/Marker] button and the indicator light goes out.  
3.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Modifying an Accompaniment  
You can add variation to the  
Automatic Accompaniment by  
pedals. For more information,  
Pedals and Performance Pads  
(Pedal Setting/User  
When you use Automatic Accompaniment, you can easily add Fill Ins to the  
accompaniment patterns, change arrangements, and make other changes.  
I Changing the Accompaniment Pattern (Fill In  
Buttons)  
There are two accompaniment patterns: the Original, and a Variation. In addition, a  
fill-in (or short phrase) is added at the points where the accompaniment patterns  
change, which adds more interest to the song. It can be effective to use the simpler  
original pattern for the first half of the song, and the variation pattern for the second  
half.  
Functions)(p. 126).  
Whats a Fill In?  
A short improvisational phrase inserted at the bar line is called a Fill In.”  
The KR105 automatically plays the appropriate phrase for the selected Music Style.  
fig.panel2-7  
Press the Fill In [To Variation] button and watch the indicator flash.  
The instrument is set so that the variation performance pattern is played.  
Press the Fill In [To Original] button and watch the indicator flash.  
The instrument is set so that the original performance pattern is played.  
Pressing these buttons during a performance inserts a one-bar fill-in at the  
appropriate place and time.  
Adding a Fill-in without Changing the Accompaniment Pattern  
You can play only the fill-in, without changing the accompaniment pattern.  
Press the lit [To Original] or [To Variation] Fill In button during the performance.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
I Changing Accompaniment Patterns in the Screen  
You can change accompaniment patterns in intros, fill-ins, endings, and so on by  
touching the screen. This lets you enjoy even more advanced performances.  
1.  
2.  
Press the One Touch [Arranger] button.  
The Arranger basic screen is displayed.  
Touch <Arranger>.  
The following screen appears.  
fig.d-cntdwn.eps_60  
Touch the screen to change the accompaniment pattern.  
Leading Bass  
The Leading Bass function allows you to change the way the Arranger reads the  
chords you play. If <Leading Bass> is off, the Acc Bass partplays the root of the  
chords that feed the Arranger, while the chords of the ACCOMP 1~6 parts are voiced  
in such a way as to avoid semitone intervals (for complex chords) that wouldnt  
sound very nice.  
Leading Bass function gives you more artistic license because you specify the notes  
played by the Acc Bass part. Switch on <Leading Bass> for songs that rely on bass  
rather than on chord patterns (for example C C/B C/Bb, etc.).  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
I Changing the Instrumental Makeup of Music  
Styles (Style Orchestrator)  
You can change the arrangement of an accompaniment. This function is called Style  
Orchestrator.Each Music Style has four different accompaniment arrangements.  
1.  
2.  
Press the [Style Orchestrator] button and watch the indicator light up.  
When you press the [User  
Function] buttons, the [Style  
Orchestrator] buttons  
function of the Performance  
Pads changes. For details refer  
to p. 66 and p. 126.  
The instrument is set to allow you to change the arrangement with the Performance Pads.  
Press Performance Pad [1]–[3] to change the arrangement for the  
accompaniment.  
Watch the indicator of the button you pressed light up.  
.
Button  
1 (Basic)  
Explanation  
This is the simplest arrangement.  
This is a more involved arrangement.  
This is the most elavorate arrangement.  
2 (Advanced)  
3 (Full)  
When simple Music Styles are  
selected, there may be no  
change in the arrangement  
even when you use the Style  
Orchestrator function.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Adding Harmony to the Right-Hand  
Part (Melody Intelligence)  
You can add harmony to the notes you play on the keyboard.  
While an Automatic Accompaniment is playing, the matching harmony is  
automatically added to the notes you are playing with the right hand. This function  
is called Melody Intelligence.”  
1.  
Press the [Melody Intelligence] button and watch the indicator light up.  
When you play something on the right-hand section of the keyboard, harmony is  
added.  
The following Melody Intelligence screenappears.  
fig.d-melointel.eps_60  
2.  
3.  
Select and touch a harmony type.  
Then when you play a melody on the keyboard, a harmony style is automatically  
added.  
With some harmonies, Tones  
may change automatically.  
Also, when you play several  
keys at the same time, in some  
cases harmony may be added  
to one note.  
When you touch <Exit>, youre returned to the previous screen, while the Melody  
Intelligence function remains selected.  
Press the [Melody Intelligence] button once more and the indicator light  
goes out.  
The Melody Intelligence function is cancelled.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Playing Sounds in the Left Hand (Lower Tone)  
Normally, when using Automatic Accompaniment in a performance, sounds are not  
produced by playing the left-hand part of the keyboard. When you touch the  
<Lower> icon, you can have Tones from the left side of the keyboard play  
simultaneously with the Automatic Accompaniment.  
1.  
2.  
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.  
This sets the Automatic Accompaniment.  
On the Basic screen, touch <Lower>.  
Now when you play a chord in the left-hand keyboard area, the notes you play will  
sound, and the accompaniment chord changes.  
fig.d-lower.eps_60  
Stopping the Sound in the Left-hand  
3.  
Touch <Lower>.  
The <Lower> icon returns to the original color.  
The lower Tones stop playing.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Playing the Piano with Accompaniment Added  
(Piano Style Arranger)  
Usually with Automatic Accompaniment, you play chords on the left-hand side of  
the keyboard and the melody on the right-hand side. Chords can also be recognized  
over the entire keyboard, allowing you to perform using Automatic Accompaniment  
without splitting the keyboard. This function is called Piano Style Arranger.”  
This makes it possible to add an accompaniment automatically as you play a song  
by playing chords in the ordinary way, without giving any thought to the location  
of a keyboard split.  
1.  
2.  
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.  
Touch <Split> to turn the Split function off.  
fig.d-pianist.eps_60  
3.  
4.  
Select a Music Style (p. 39).  
Play the keyboard.  
The accompaniment starts when you play a chord anywhere on the keyboard.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each  
Part (Balance)  
You can adjust the volume balance between the accompaniment and the keyboard,  
and the volume balance for each of the parts in a Music Style.  
I Changing the Volume Balance between the  
NOTE  
Accompaniment and the Keyboard (Balance Knob)  
When this knob is turned  
completely to the  
You can change the volume balance between a song and accompaniment and the  
Accompaniment side, no  
sounds from the keyboard are  
audible, even when the keys  
are pressed. You can usually  
leave the knob at the center  
position.  
notes you play on the keyboard.  
1.  
Adjust the volume balance with the Balance knob.  
fig.volbal.e  
I Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each  
Performance Part (Part Balance)  
You can adjust the volume of each performance part in a Music Style, and the  
balance between parts when playing multiple Tones on the keyboard.  
1.  
Press the [Part Balance] button and watch the indicator light up.  
The following Part Balance screenappears.  
Touch <Accomp> or <Keyboard> to switch the two screens.  
fig.d-partbal1.eps_60  
Switch the screens  
The volume balance between each of the performance parts in the Music Style is  
indicated.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Display  
Rhythm  
Music Style Rhythm Part  
Bass  
Bass, Bass Tone (p. 44)  
Accompaniment 1, Accompaniment 2, Accompani-  
ment 3, Chord Tone (p. 44)  
Accomp  
Short phrases sounded when the Performance Pads  
are pressed.  
Phrase  
fig.d-partbal2.eps_60  
Switch the screens  
This shows the volume balance between each of the keyboards Tones when layer  
performance (p. 25) or split performance (p. 26) are used, or the volume balance  
when using the keyboard to play percussion instruments or sound effects (p. 22).  
Displayed  
Drums  
Tone Part  
Percussion instruments or sound effects played with the keys  
Lower  
Layer  
Upper  
Left-hand Tone  
Layer Tone  
Right-hand Tone  
2.  
Touch each slider  
to adjust the volume balance.  
You can also make these adjustments by touching the adjustment sliders and then  
using the dial.  
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Song Playback  
Playing a Song  
Now, lets try practicing while playing back internal songs, commercial music files,  
and songs on floppy disk.  
You can use rewind or fast-forward to go to any desired measure, and play back  
from that point.  
fig.panel3-1  
Selecting the Song  
1.  
Press the [Song/File] button.  
The following Song Selection screenappears.  
fig.d-songsel.eps_60  
Touch and drag up and down in the scroll bar to scroll through the screen and  
display other songs.  
Touch the page icons <  
> <  
> to change pages.  
: The fingering is included in the notation.  
: The chords are indicated in the notation.  
: You can display song lyrics.  
If there is recorded song data,  
the Delete songscreen  
appears.  
When you touch <  
>, songs selected from all of the internal songs are played in  
random order.  
When you touch <  
>, all of the songs in the genre you have selected are played  
in order, starting from the selected song. When the last song is finished, playback  
resumes from the first song in the genre.  
If its okay to delete the song,  
want to delete the song, touch  
<Cancel>, andregister the song  
to the Favorites (p. 59).  
<
>: The selected song is played back. This changes to <  
>.  
By touching <File>, you can view information about the song (p. 141) and save songs  
(p. 87).  
<
><  
>: The song genre changes.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
2.  
Touch the name of the song to be played back.  
You use and the dial to select songs.  
Playing back  
Press the [  
3.  
(Play/Stop)] button.  
The button indicator lights up, and playback of the song begins.  
Stopping the Song  
Press the [  
4.  
(Play/Stop)] button once again.  
The button indicator light goes out, and the song stops.  
When the song is finished, playback stops automatically.  
Press the [  
(Reset)] button to return to the beginning of the song.  
NOTE  
When you start playback of  
songs, the measure number on  
the Basic screen appears in  
reverse video. The  
Record/Playback Buttons  
fig.composer.e  
performance data is being  
loaded while the indication is  
highlighted; please wait a few  
moments for this to be  
completed.  
Track buttons (Rhythm, Whole, Bass/Accomp, Lower, Upper):  
Each performance part of the song being played back is assigned to a track button. Use these  
buttons to select the performance parts that are muted or played. For more detailed  
information, refer to p. 69.  
[
(Reset)] button: Returns to the beginning of the song.  
[
(Play/Stop)] button:  
NOTE  
Plays back the song, or if the song is currently being played, it stops the song.  
When using markers to specify  
a section to be repeated (p. 72),  
you can rewind and fast  
forward only within the range  
between Marker A and  
Marker B.  
[
[
(Rec)] button: Records the performance. For more detailed information, refer to p. 75.  
(Bwd)] button: Moves back the playback position of the song one measure each time  
the button is pressed. When held down, the song rewindscontinuously.  
(Fwd)] button: Advances the playback position of the song one measure each time the  
button is pressed. When held down, the song is forwarded continuously.  
[
Holding down the [  
(Play/Stop)] button and pressing the [  
(Fwd)] button moves  
you to the end of the song.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
When Selecting Songs in Folders  
1. Touch the folder name.  
2. Touch <  
> at the bottom left of the screen.  
After a moment, a list of songs in the folder is displayed.  
You can also select the folder using the dial or the [ (Bwd)] or [  
button on the remote; the folder can then be opened by pressing the  
(PLAY)] button.  
(Fwd)]  
NOTE  
If a folder contains 500 or more  
files and/or folders, some of  
the files and folders may not  
be displayed.  
[
3. Touch a song from the list that appears to select the song you want to  
play back.  
* Depending on the number of songs contained in a folder, this may take some time.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I Using Keywords to Search for Songs (Song Search)  
You can search for songs that match the conditions you set regarding the song tempo  
or genre.  
Only the KR105s internal  
songs are searchable.  
You can also search the songs using the first character of the song name.  
1.  
Press the [Song/File] button.  
2.  
Touch <  
>.  
The following screen appears.  
fig.d-songsrch1.eps_60  
Condition Search screen  
Name Search screen  
Touch here to switch these screens.  
Searching by Conditions  
3.  
Touch the parameter you want to set, then use the dial to select the search  
conditions.  
With <Data>, songs are searched according to data included in the internal songs.  
You can use four different criteria in searches: Chords,” “Lyrics,” “Finger(fingering  
numbers), and Any.By selecting a song containing any of this data, then displaying  
it in the KR105s notation, you can display information about the selected data.  
4.  
Touch <Search>.  
The search results appear in the display.  
Touch the song name to select the song.  
Touch <Exit> to return to the Song Selection screen.  
Searching by Song Name  
3.  
4.  
Touch <By Name>.  
Touch <By Key> to return to the Condition Search screen.  
Decide which character you will use for the search.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.  
Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in  
succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group  
(ABC...).  
Touch <A-0> to toggle between alphabets and numerals.  
5.  
Touch <Search>.  
The search results appear in the display.  
Touch the song name to select the song.  
Touch <Exit> several times to return to the previous screen.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Registering the Songs You Like (Favorites)  
You can register songs you are currently practicing or enjoy playing to Favorites,”  
allowing you to select these songs easily.  
Selecting the Song  
1.  
Press the [Song/File] button.  
The Song Selection screen appears (p. 54).  
fig.d-songsel.eps_60  
2.  
Touch the song name to select the song to be registered.  
Registering to Favorites  
3.  
Touch <Favorites>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.m-fvrtadd.eps_60  
4.  
Touch <OK>.  
The selected song is registered to Favorites.  
Now you can select the registered song by selecting Favorites for the genre in the  
Song Selection screen.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
I Removing Songs From Favorites  
This deletes registered songs for Favorites.  
1.  
In the Song Selection screen, select Favorites for the genre.  
fig.d-song-fvrt.eps_60  
2.  
3.  
Touch the name of the song to be deleted.  
Touch <Del>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.m-fvrtdel.eps_60  
4.  
Touch <OK>.  
The song is deleted from the Favorites family.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Practice Functions  
With the KR105, you can enjoy practice using a variety of functions.  
Displaying Scores  
The KR105 can display scores not only for the internal songs, but for music files and  
performances recorded with the KR105. This is very convenient for performing  
while reading the music and for checking songs that have been recorded. When you  
play back a music file with lyrics, the lyrics appear on screen.  
Selecting the song  
When playing back songs on floppy disks, first insert the floppy disk in the disk  
drive.  
1.  
2.  
Press the [Song/File] button to select a song.  
For details refer to Playing a Song(p. 54).  
Press the [DigiScore] button.  
The Score screenappears.  
fig.d-score.eps_60  
In some internal songs, the  
fingering is displayed.  
The fingering numbers shown  
in the screen indicate one  
possible fingering.  
Icon  
Description  
Displays an enlarged score.  
You can also display the note names.  
The score and keyboard are displayed on the KR105. This al-  
lows you to check the keys that are pressed for the sounds  
played back.  
Selects the part for which the score is displayed.  
*
<Option> (p. 64).  
Chord names can be displayed  
and recorded performances  
using the KR105s Chord  
Sequencer (p. 106).  
<Option>  
Makes detailed settings for the score display (p. 64).  
The left pedal functions as the Replay.When you press the  
pedal during the playback of the song, playback stops, and  
when you release the pedal, playback resumes starting at the  
beginning of that measure. When the pedal is pressed in rapid  
succession, playback is returned the same number of  
measures as the number of times the pedal is pressed.  
In situations such as when you want to hear a difficult phrase  
repeated a number of times, you can press the pedal to go to  
an earlier point in the song.  
<Replay>  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
3.  
Press the [  
(Play/Stop)] button.  
Playback of the song begins, and the score advances along with the progression of  
the performance.  
Notes Regarding the Score Display  
NOTE  
When playback of a song begins,  
appears in the Score screen. While this  
symbol is displayed, performance data is being loaded from floppy disk or  
internal memory. It may take thirty seconds to a minute or more to read the  
data. Please wait.  
No notes are shown in the  
the part being displayed, refer  
to Making Detailed Settings  
for the Score Display(p. 64).  
The displayed scores are based on music files. Priority is placed on the  
readability of the displayed music, not on the accurate rendition of difficult,  
high-level performances. Thus, there may be discrepancies seen when compared  
with commercially available printed music. The display is not intended for  
viewing advanced songs requiring precisely detailed scores, or complex songs.  
On the score display screen, lyrics and notes may extend beyond the range  
displayed on the screen and may not be visible.  
Playback may start over from the beginning if you display the score or change  
the displayed part during playback of the song.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
I Touching Notes to Confirm the Sounds  
(Touch the Notes)  
In the Score screen, you can have notes played by touching the notes on the screen.  
When you touch <  
> to show the keyboard on the screen, the touched note is  
indicated by the corresponding note on the keyboard. This allows you to confirm  
notes by sight, sound, and touch.  
In addition, when you trace part of the score with your finger, the traced segment is  
played back. This allows you to easily play back phrases you like.  
fig.d-score-key.eps_60  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
I Making Detailed Settings for the Score Display  
You can change the part appearing on the score display and change the manner in  
which the score is displayed.  
1.  
2.  
Press the [DigiScore] button to display the Score screen.  
Touch <Option>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.d-scoreopt.eps_60  
Switch the screens  
3.  
Touch  
for the parameter being set to select the value.  
Touch <Exit> to return to the Score screen.  
Item  
Setting  
Lyrics  
Sets whether or not the lyrics  
appear in the music.  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
The lyrics are displayed.  
In some internal songs, the  
fingering is displayed.  
The fingering numbers shown  
in the screen indicate one  
possible fingering.  
Not displayed.  
Finger Numbers  
Whether or not the fingering  
appears in the music.  
The fingering is displayed.  
Not displayed.  
Chords  
Whether or not chord names  
appear in the music.  
The chord names are displayed.  
Not displayed.  
Chord names can be displayed  
and recorded performances  
using the KR105s Chord  
Sequencer (p. 106).  
OFF  
Not displayed.  
C, D, E  
The pitch names (C, D, E) are displayed.  
Pitches  
Sets whether or not the note  
names appear in the music  
when the score is expanded.  
Do, Re, Mi  
(Fixed)  
The pitch names (fixed Do) are dis-  
played.  
Do, Re, Mi  
(Movable)  
The syllable names (movable Do) are dis-  
played.  
Clef L  
Auto  
Display is switched automatically.  
G (treble) clef is displayed in the score.  
F (bass) clef is displayed in the score.  
Display is switched automatically.  
G (treble) clef is displayed in the score.  
F (bass) clef is displayed in the score.  
Key is switched automatically.  
Determines whether a treble or  
bass clef is shown in the score  
for the left-hand part.  
G Clef  
F Clef  
Auto  
Clef R  
Determines whether treble or  
bass clef is shown in the score  
for the right-hand part.  
G Clef  
F Clef  
Auto  
Key  
Score is displayed in the speci-  
fied key.  
b x 50–  
# x 6  
Score is displayed in the specified key.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Item  
Setting  
User Part  
User Track,  
Parts 116  
Selects the part to display when Useris selected as  
the part to be displayed.  
Lower Part  
Lower Track,  
Parts 116  
Selects the part to display when Loweris selected as  
the part to be displayed.  
Upper Part  
Upper Track,  
Part 116  
Selects the part to display when Upperis selected as  
the part to be displayed.  
I Saving Scores as Image Data  
You can take scores that are displayed on the KR105 and save them to floppy disks.  
You can also use saved image data to your computer.  
NOTE  
Other than for your own  
personal enjoyment, use of the  
the permission of the  
copyright holder is prohibited  
by law.  
1.  
Insert the floppy disk onto which you want to save the image data in the  
Use a floppy disk formatted on the KR105. For more on formatting disks, refer to p.  
85.  
2.  
3.  
Press the [Song/File] button to select a song.  
Press the [DigiScore] button.  
The Score screen appears.  
4.  
5.  
Touch <Option>.  
Touch <Export>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.d-scorebmp.eps_60  
6.  
7.  
Touch  
for each parameter to set the range of the image data.  
Touch <Execute>.  
The score is saved to the floppy disk as image data in BMP (bitmap) format.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Adjusting the Tempo  
This changes the song and Music Style tempos.  
If songs seem difficult to play at their original speed, you may find it helpful to first  
practice with the tempo slowed down. Then, after becoming more familiar with the  
song, you can practice it at a gradually faster tempo.  
Changing the tempo has no effect on the pitch of the notes. And you can change the  
tempo even when the song is in progress.  
Adjusting the Tempo with the Tempo [-] [+] Buttons  
Pressing the [+] button once increases the tempo by one unit. Holding down the  
button makes the tempo increase continuously.  
Pressing the [-] button once decreases the tempo by one unit. Holding down the  
button makes the tempo decrease continuously.  
Pressing the [-] [+] buttons simultaneously returns the selected Music Style or song  
to the basic tempo.  
I Setting the Tempo by Pressing the Button in Time  
(Tap Tempo)  
You can also set the tempo by pressing the Performance Pad. This feature is called  
Tap Tempo.By using the Tap Tempo function, you can quickly set the tempo you  
are thinking of, without specifying the tempo in numerical terms.  
Assigning Functions to the Performance Pads  
1.  
Press the [User Function] button and watch the indicator light up.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2.  
3.  
Touch  
for the Performance Pad to which the function is  
You can also assign the Tap  
Tempo function to the pedal,  
the tempo. For details, refer to  
Pedals and Performance Pads  
(Pedal Setting/User  
assigned, then select “Tap Tempo.”  
Touch <Exit>; the tempo is indicated in the upper left of the screen.  
Specifying the Tempo  
Functions)(p. 126).  
4.  
Press the Pad to which “Tap Tempo” is assigned at least twice.  
The tempo is set to the song you used when tapping the button.  
I Playing Back at a Fixed Tempo (Tempo Mute)  
If a song has tempo changes, it helps to practice the song first at a steady tempo.  
Overriding tempo changes is called Tempo Muting.”  
1.  
Hold down the [  
[+] buttons.  
(Play/Stop)] button and press one of the Tempo [-]  
When tempo muting is in effect, the tempo display appears in reverse video.  
fig.d-tempmute.eps_60  
When you play back the song, it will play at a constant tempo.  
Cancel the Tempo Mute Setting  
1.  
Hold down the [  
(Play/Stop)] button and press one of the Tempo [-]  
[+] buttons.  
Tempo muting is canceled.  
Tempo Mute will also be cancelled when you select a different song.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Match the Tempo Before You Begin  
Playing (Count In)  
When youre playing along with a song, you can listen to the tempo before you start  
playing by adding a count-in.  
This audible count before the song playback is called a Count-In.”  
fig.panel3-3  
1.  
Press the [Count/Marker] button and watch the indicator light up.  
The following Count settings screenappears.  
fig.d-cntin.eps_60  
You can have a count sound be  
played before the song starts  
playing back by holding down  
the [  
(Reset)] button while  
)Play/  
you press the [(  
stop] button.The status of the  
Count settings wont be  
affected by your use of this  
procedure.  
2.  
Touch <Count Mode>  
Down.”  
to set this to “Count In” or “Count In/  
With this setting, two measures count down before the song playback starts.  
Cancelling the Count In  
on the Count settings screen,  
refer to Changing the Settings  
for the Count(p. 131).  
1.  
Press the [Count/Marker] button so its indicator is turned off.  
By touching <Exit> instead of the [Count/Mark] button, you can close the Count  
settings screen without cancelling the count.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Muting Some Parts Before Playing  
(Track Buttons)  
For more on music files, refer  
to Music Files That the KR105  
Can Use(p. 168).  
With commercially available music files for piano lessons, the part for each hand can  
be played back independently. This makes it easy to practice hands separately. For  
example, you can follow along with your right hand while you listen to that same  
right-hand part be played, or you can practice the left-hand part while the right-hand  
part plays.  
A music file for piano lessons may be assigned to the five Track buttons as shown below.  
If a single Track button  
includes more than one  
instruments, take a look at  
Each Part(p. 100).  
Drums/SFX  
Accom-  
paniment  
Left-hand Right-hand  
Part Part  
By using these Track buttons, you can eliminate the sound of specific parts. This is  
referred to as muting.”  
By recording your own performances to the Track Buttons in this fashion, you can  
mute parts the same way. For details, refer to Recording While Selecting the Track  
Buttons (Redoing Recordings)(p. 81).  
When a single Part is not  
played, it is called Minus  
One.Using Minus One, you  
can mute out a particular  
instrument and play the part  
yourself.  
1.  
Select the song that you wish to play back (p. 54).  
Selecting the Part that Youll be Playing  
2.  
Press any one of the Track buttons to make the button’s indicator light go  
dark.  
The sound for the selected part no longer plays.  
For example, when practicing the right hand, press the [4/Upper] button.  
When playing back SMF files  
for Roland Piano Digital series  
instruments, and the [3/  
Lower] button and [4/Upper]  
button do not correctly control  
the lower/ upper  
performances, please change  
the Track Assignsettings.  
Parts Assigned to the Track  
Buttons During SMF Playback  
(Track Assign)(p. 142).  
When you play back the song, the right-hand performance will not sound. Practice  
your right-hand performance along with the left-hand playback.  
Playing Back a Song  
Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button.  
3.  
The song will begin playing back.  
The part you selected in step 2 will not sound.  
Once again press the button you selected in step 2. The buttons indicator will light  
up, and the part will be heard once again.  
Even while the song is playing, you can press the track buttons to mute or un-mute  
the sound.  
Stopping the Song  
You can adjust the balance  
Adjusting the Volume  
Balance for Each Performance  
Part (Part Balance)(p. 52).  
4.  
Press the [  
(Play/Stop)] button.  
The song will stop.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Setting Markers for Repeated Practice  
(Marker)  
By setting markers at points in a song that you want to practice repeatedly, you can  
then easily go to and repeat play back of the selected measures.  
I Placing a Marker within a Song  
You can place two separate markers (Marker A and Marker B) in one song. These  
markers are placed at the beginning of a measure to make the beginning and end of  
a section of music. Placing markers is a handy way to start playback at the same  
place as many times as you like. You can add markers or move to a marker even  
while playback is in progress.  
Access the Marker Screen  
First, select the song in which youll set the markers (p. 54).  
1.  
2.  
Press the [Count/Marker] button.  
Touch <Marker>.  
The Marker screen appears.  
fig.d-marker.eps_60  
Placing Markers  
3.  
4.  
Go to the measure where you want to set a marker using the [  
and [ (Fwd)] buttons.  
(Bwd)]  
Touch <- - -> for Marker A.  
Marker A is placed at the beginning of the measure you selected.  
- - -on the screen will change to the number of the measure where you placed the  
measures. Refer to Placing a  
Marker in the Middle of a  
Measure(p. 131).  
marker.  
5.  
In the same way, touch the Marker B <- - -> to set Marker B.  
It is not possible to assign marker B to the same location or a measure before marker A.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
I Playback from a Marker Location  
1.  
At the marker screen, touch the measure number of the marker you want  
to go to.  
Playback will start from wherever Marker A or Marker B are set.  
With the song playing back, playback will continue if you touch Marker A or Marker  
B on the Marker screen.  
I Erasing a Marker  
1.  
Touch <Clear> for the marker you want to erase.  
fig.d-markclear.eps_60  
The marker disappears and the on-screen display changes to <- - ->.  
I Moving a Marker  
You can move a marker that has been placed in a song. You can also move the section  
of music defined by Markers A and B forward or back, without changing the number  
of measures of marked.  
1.  
On the Marker screen, touch  
or  
for the marker to be moved.  
fig.d-mark1-5.eps_60  
When you touch  
When you touch  
, the marker is moved to a previous part of the song.  
, the marker is moved to a later part of the song.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Moving Markers A and B without Changing the Interval Between Them  
On the Marker screen, touch or in the middle of the screen.  
1.  
For example, if you have Marker A set at the beginning of the fifth measure, and  
Marker B set at the beginning of the ninth measure, when you touch  
A is moved to the beginning of the first measure, and Marker B is moved to the  
beginning of the fifth measure.  
, Marker  
Touch  
to shift Marker A to the beginning of the ninth measure and Marker B  
to the beginning of the thirteenth measure.  
fig.markerA-B.e  
Measure  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15  
16  
Marker A  
Marker B  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15  
16  
Measure  
Marker A  
Marker B  
I Playing Back the Same Passage Over and Over  
You can play back a particular passage over and over. This is convenient when you  
want to focus on a passage.  
1.  
First, set Marker A and Marker B to define the measures you want to  
repeat.  
For instance, suppose you want to play back the passage from the fifth through  
eighth measures over and over. You should place Marker A at the beginning of the  
fifth bar and Marker B at the beginning of the ninth bar.  
fig.d-markrpt.eps_60  
Off  
On  
When <Repeat> is On  
If neither Marker A nor  
Marker B is set, the song is  
played back from the  
beginning to the end.  
If you only place marker A,  
playback repeats from  
marker A to the end of the  
song.  
If you only place marker B,  
playback repeats from the  
beginning of the song to  
marker B.  
2.  
Touch <Repeat> in the Marker screen.  
The setting is made for repeated playback of the passage from marker A to marker B.  
When you play the song, the marked section of music plays back repeatedly.  
Cancelling Repeat Playback  
3.  
Touch <Repeat> in the Marker screen, and the icon returns to the  
original color.  
Repeat playback is cancelled.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Transposing Keyboard Sounds and  
Songs Played Back (Transpose)  
By using the Transpose function,you can transpose your performance without  
changing the notes you play. For example, even if the song is in a difficult key with  
many sharps (#) or flats (b), you can transpose it to a key that is easier for you to read  
and play.  
You can also use this function to play back a song in a different key.  
When accompanying a vocalist, you can easily transpose the pitch to a range that is  
comfortable for the singer, while still playing the notes as written (i.e., with the same  
fingering positions).  
First make sure you have selected the song to be transposed (p. 54).  
1.  
Press the [Transpose] button.  
A Transpose screenlike the one below appears.  
fig.d-transpose.eps_60  
2.  
3.  
Touch the Transpose icon.  
Icon  
Target  
Settings Value  
Keyboard sound  
-6~0~5  
Song to be played back  
-24~0~24  
-6~0~5  
Keyboard sounds, songs being played back  
Touch the screen keyboard or  
value.  
,
to select the transposition  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Each time you press  
When you touch  
or  
, it transposes the key by a semitone.  
, a value of 0is set.  
You can also use the dial to change the transposition value.  
When you transpose a song or the keyboard, the [Transpose] buttons indicator  
lights up. As you play the keyboard or play back the song, the notes are transposed.  
When you touch <Exit>, the transposition remains in effect, and youre returned to  
the previous screen.  
Cancelling Transposition  
4.  
Press the [Transpose] button and the indicator light goes out.  
The transposition value reverts  
to 0when you turn off the  
power or select another song.  
Transposition is cancelled.  
The next time you press the [Transpose] button, illuminating the indicator, the music  
is transposed by the value set here.  
Example: Playing a song in E major while playing the keys  
for C major  
In this example, C is the root note in the key of C major. E, the root of E major, is the  
third in C major. It is up four keys, including the black keys, so touch  
, then  
enter 4for the setting.  
fig.trans.e  
If you play C E G  
It will sound E G# B  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Recording and Saving the Performance  
You can easily record performances using the five track buttons.  
NOTE  
A recorded performance can be played back to listen to your own playing, or to add  
additional parts.  
Recorded performances are  
discarded when another song  
important performances. Take  
a look at Saving Songs(p.  
87).  
You can use the KR105 to make the following kinds of recordings.  
(New Song)(p. 76)  
Recording Along with a Song(p. 80)  
Re-recording Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing  
Recordings)(p. 81)  
If the Following Screen Appears  
If youve recorded a song or changed a songs settings (see p. 100), the following  
message appears on the screen when you try to choose another song.  
If its okay to delete the song, touch <OK>.  
If you do not want to delete the song, touch <Cancel>, and either save the song (p.  
87) or register the song to the Favorites (p. 59).  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Recording a New Song (New Song)  
This records keyboard performances without the use of the internal songs or  
Automatic Accompaniment.  
Settings for Recording Performances  
1.  
2.  
Press One Touch Program [Piano] button.  
This sets the KR105 for performance without the use of Automatic Accompaniment.  
Decide on the tone of the performance (p. 21).  
Use the Tone buttons and the touch screen to select the tone. When you have finished  
choosing the settings, touch <Exit> to display the Basic screen.  
Recording Settings  
3.  
Press the [  
(Rec)] button.  
You press the [  
(Rec)] button and the following messages will appear, when a  
song has already been recorded.  
fig.m-rec.eps_60  
If you select <New Song>  
when a song has already been  
recorded, the OK to delete  
information, refer to If the  
Following Screen Appears(p.  
75).  
Touch <New Song>.  
This switches the KR105 to the settings required for recording a new song.  
The KR105 is put in recording standby.  
To cancel recording, press the [  
(Rec)] button once more.  
4.  
Decide on the tempo and beat.  
If necessary, press the [Metronome] button to play the metronome.  
When you have finished making the settings, touch <Exit> to display the Basic  
screen.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Start Recording  
Press the [  
NOTE  
Any performance that has  
been recorded is deleted when  
the power to the KR105 is  
a performance deleted, then  
save it to Favorites. Refer to  
Saving Songs(p. 87).  
5.  
(Play/Stop)] button.  
A two-bar count-in plays, then recording starts.  
Even without pressing the [  
(Play/Stop)] button, recording starts when you  
play the keyboard. There is no count-in played when you start by playing rather than  
pushing the [  
(Play/Stop)] button.  
When recording starts, the [  
light up.  
(Play/Stop)] and [  
(Rec)] buttonsindicators  
Stop Recording  
6.  
Press the [  
(Play/Stop)] button.  
Recording stops.  
The performance is recorded to the [1/Whole] button.  
Listening to the Recorded Performance  
Press the [ (Reset)] button, then press the [  
7.  
(Play/Stop)] button.  
The recorded performance is played back.  
When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, playback stops.  
Track buttons assignments for recorded performances  
When you record only a keyboard performance, the performance will be assigned to  
the track buttons as follows.  
Normal performance (playing a single Tone from the entire keyboard)  
The performance is recorded to the [1/Whole] button.  
Layer performance  
The performance is recorded to the [2/Bass/Accomp] button.  
Split performance  
The lower part of the keyboard is recorded to the [3/Lower] button, and the  
upper part of the keyboard is recorded to the [4/Upper] button.  
Layer performance and Split performance  
The performance played in the left side of the keyboard is recorded to the [3/  
Lower] button, the performance in the right side to the [4/Upper] button, and the  
Layer performance to the [2/Bass/Accomp] button.  
Drum set or sound effect performance  
Recorded on the [R/Rhythm] button.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recording With Accompaniment  
Try recording a performance along with the Automatic Accompaniment.  
Settings for Recording Performances  
1.  
2.  
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.  
This chooses the setting for Automatic Accompaniment.  
Decide on the Music Style.  
When you have finished choosing the settings, touche <Exit> to display the Basic  
screen.  
Recording Settings  
3.  
Press the [  
(Rec)] button.  
You press the [  
(Rec)] button and the following messages will appear, when a  
song has already been recorded.  
fig.m-rec.eps_60  
If you select <New Song>  
when a song has already been  
recorded, the OK to delete  
information, refer to If the  
Following Screen Appears(p.  
75).  
Touch <New Song>.  
This switches the KR105 to the settings required for recording a new song.  
The KR105 is put in recording standby.  
To cancel recording, press the [  
(Rec)] button once more.  
4.  
Decide on the tempo.  
Start Recording  
You can change how recording  
Accompaniment. To learn  
how, see Changing How  
Recording Stops(p. 82).  
5.  
Play a chord on the lower part of the keyboard.  
An Automatic Accompaniment intro starts, and recording starts at the same time.  
Stop Recording  
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.  
6.  
An ending plays, then the Automatic Accompaniment, and recording stop at the  
same time.  
Listening to the Recorded Performance  
Press the [ (Reset)] button, then press the [  
7.  
(Play/Stop)] button.  
The recorded performance plays back.  
When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, playback stops.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
eight parts. For details, refer to  
Music Styles and Automatic  
Accompaniment(p. 35).  
Track buttons assignments for recorded performances  
Performances that have been recorded using Automatic Accompaniment are  
assigned to the track buttons as shown below.  
Track button  
[R/Rhythm]  
Performance Recorded  
here. In addition, drum sets and effect sounds that are selected  
with the keys in a performance are recorded to this track.  
When using Piano Style accompaniment (p. 51), the performance  
played on the keyboard is recorded here.  
[1/Whole]  
The Automatic Accompaniment bass part and accompaniment  
part are recorded here.  
[2/ Bass Accomp]  
When the KR105 is set so that sounds from performances on the  
left-hand side of the keyboard are played while the Automatic  
Accompaniment sounds (p. 50), your own performance on the  
left-hand side of the keyboard is recorded here.  
[3/Lower]  
[4/Upper]  
Your own performance on the right-hand side of the keyboard is  
recorded here.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recording Along with a Song  
Try recording along with internal songs and songs on floppy disk.  
Here, record your right-hand performance along with the song accompaniment.  
Settings for Recording Performances  
Select a song before you begin recording.  
When you have selected the song, press the [DigiScore] button to display the notation.  
For more on how to select songs, refer to p. 54; for instructions on displaying the  
notation, refer to p. 61.  
1.  
Decide on the tone and tempo of the performance.  
After choosing the settings, touch <Exit> to display the Basic screen.  
The song tempo is stored  
within the song you selected.  
Recording Settings  
2.  
Press the [  
(Rec)] button.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.m-rec.eps_60  
3.  
Touch <Add On>.  
With this setting, you can record while listening to the selected song.  
Selecting the Track to Record  
4.  
Press the track button for the track that you want to record (i.e., the track  
that you want to play yourself).  
NOTE  
The indicator of the button you pressed will blink, and the KR105 enters recording-  
standby mode.  
Since in this example we will record the upper part performance, press the [4/  
Upper] button to make the buttons indicator light blink.  
Only drum sets or SFX set are  
recorded to the [R/Rhythm]  
button.  
To cancel recording, press the [  
(Rec)] button once more.  
Start Recording  
Press the [  
5.  
(Play/Stop)] button.  
A two-bar count-in plays, then recording starts.  
Even without pressing the [  
(Play/Stop)] button, recording starts when you  
play the keyboard. There is no count-in played when you start by playing the  
keyboard instead of pushing the [  
(Play/Stop)] button.  
(Play/Stop)] and [ (Rec)] buttonsindicators light.  
When recording starts, the [  
Stop Recording  
6.  
Press the [  
(Play/Stop)] button.  
Recording stops.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Listening to the Recorded Performance  
Press the [ (Reset)] button, then press the [  
7.  
(Play/Stop)] button.  
The recorded performance is played back.  
When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, recording stops.  
Recording While Selecting the Track  
Buttons (Redoing Recordings)  
When you want to re-record, specify the Track button for the performance you want  
to re-record, and then record again.  
previous recording, refer to  
Erasing Recorded  
When you select a previously recorded Track button and re-record, everything from  
the point at which you begin recording up to the point where you stop recording will  
be replaced by the newly re-recorded performance.  
Performances(p. 82).  
1.  
2.  
Use the [  
(Bwd)] and [  
(Fwd)] buttons to go to the measure  
where you want to begin recording.  
Press the [  
(Rec)] button.  
The song tempo is stored  
Recorded Songs(p. 114) and  
Changing the Tempo Within  
the Song(p. 114).  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.m-rec.eps_60  
3.  
4.  
Touch <Add on>.  
Press the Track button for the track you want to re-record.  
The indicator for the selected Track button starts blinking.  
The [  
(Play/Stop)] buttons indicator flashes, and the KR105 is put in  
recording standby.  
To cancel recording, press the [  
(Rec)] button once more.  
5.  
Press the [  
(Play/Stop)] button to begin recording.  
When rerecording an Automatic Accompaniment performance, set Sync Start (p.  
43), then specify a chord or press the [Start/Stop] button.  
6.  
Press the [  
(Play/Stop)] button to stop recording.  
If you also want to rerecord the ending of the Automatic Accompaniment, press the  
[Intro/Ending] button.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Erasing Recorded Performances  
You can use the following method to delete a recorded performance.  
1.  
Hold down the [Song/File] button and press the [  
(Rec)] button.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.m-songdel.eps_60  
2.  
Touch <OK>.  
This deletes the recorded song.  
When you touch <Cancel>, the previous screen appears and the recorded song is not  
erased.  
I Erasing the Performance on Specific Tracks  
You can select and erase performances on specific tracks.  
1.  
Hold down the Track button for the track containing the performance  
you want to erase, then press the [ (Rec)] button.  
The Track buttons light goes dark, and the recorded music is erased.  
Changing How Recording Stops  
When recording an Automatic Accompaniment performance, you can change the  
accompaniment and the way recording mode stops.  
1.  
Press the [Menu] button and watch the indicator light up.  
The Menu screen appears.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2.  
3.  
Touch <Rec Mode>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
Touch <Rec Stop>  
“Composer Stop.”  
to switch between “Arranger Stop” and  
Display  
Explanation  
Recording stops at the same time the Automatic Accompaniment  
stops.  
Arranger Stop  
Recording does not stop, even when the Automatic Accompaniment  
Composer Stop  
stops. When you press the [  
stops.  
(Play/Stop)] button, recording  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recording Songs Starting with Pickups  
You can record songs that start with pickup beats (songs that start on a beat other  
than the measures first beat).  
fig.PU.e  
Count Sound  
~
Measure –2  
PU  
Recording begins here  
1
Carry out Steps 14 on p. 76 to prepare for recording.  
If the [  
(Rec)] buttons indicator is not lit, press the [  
(Rec)] button so the  
indicator is lit.  
The KR105 is put in recording standby.  
1.  
Press the [  
(Bwd)] button once.  
The measure number in the upper right of the Basic screen changes to PU,and the  
KR105 is set to record a song starting with a pickup.  
fig.d-pu.eps_60  
Start recording. After a one-measure count, recording begins.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using Floppy Disks  
You can use the KR105s disk drive to save songs to floppy disks and listen to  
commercial music files.  
If youre using the disk drive  
for the first time, be sure to  
read the important notes on  
p. 6.  
I Inserting and Ejecting a Floppy Disk  
Inserting a floppy disk  
1.  
With the front of the floppy disk facing up, insert the disk in the disk  
drive slot until there is an audible click.  
NOTE  
fig.diskdrive.e  
Never remove the disk while  
it is being read or written.  
Doing so will scratch the  
magnetic surface of the disk,  
making it unusable. (The disk  
drive indicator will light  
brightly while data is being  
read or written. Normally, it  
will be lit dimly or will be  
dark.)  
Indicator  
Eject Button  
Floppy Disk  
Removing a floppy disk  
Press the Eject button.  
NOTE  
2.  
When a floppy disk is  
The end of the floppy disk comes out of the slot. Grasp the edge of the floppy disk  
and gently pull it out.  
initialized, all of the data  
saved on the disk is erased.  
If youre formatting a used  
floppy disk for reuse, be sure  
to check first to make sure the  
disk doesnt contain any data  
you dont want to lose.  
I Formatting Floppy Disks (Format)  
A newly purchased floppy disk, or a floppy disk that has been used by another  
device cannot be used as is. Such floppy disks must be formatted(initialized) for  
use with the KR105.  
If a floppy disk is in a format that doesnt match the format of this unit, you wont be  
able to use that floppy disk.  
fig.panel4-3  
First make sure that the protect tab of the floppy disk is in the Write (write enable)”  
position.  
Rear side of the disk  
WRITE  
(you can save data to the disk)  
Protect tab  
PROTECT (you cannot save data)  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
1.  
2.  
3.  
Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive.  
Press the [Song/File] button.  
Touch <File>.  
A Song File Menuscreen like the one below appears.  
fig.d-songfile.eps_60  
4.  
5.  
Touch <Format Disk>.  
The following screen appears.  
fig.d-format.eps_60  
NOTE  
Dont try to take the floppy  
disk out of the disk drive until  
the formatting process is  
finished.  
NOTE  
Touch <OK>.  
If Errorappears on screen,  
take a look at Error  
Initialization of the disk begins.  
Touch <Cancel> to go back to the previous screen.  
When initialization is completed, youre returned to the previous screen.  
Messages(p. 155).  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Saving Songs  
A recorded performance is discarded when you switch off the power or choose  
another song. Storing recorded performances and other data to floppy disks or the  
Favorites is called saving.Be sure to save important songs to floppy disks or  
Favorites.  
on the KR105. Take a look at  
Formatting Floppy Disks  
(Format)(p. 85).  
What are Favorites?”  
You can register songs you are currently practicing or particularly like to  
Favorites,allowing you to select these songs easily (p. 59).  
On the KR105, when you register a song on a floppy disk to Favorites, you can then  
play back the song without inserting the floppy disk in the disk drive.  
If a recorded performance is saved to Favorites, the performance wont be erased  
NOTE  
when the power is turned off.  
Some commercially available  
music files cannot be saved  
because they are copy  
protected.  
Preparations for Saving Data  
When saving to floppy disks, first check to make sure that the floppy disks protect  
tab is set to the Writeposition (p. 85), then insert the floppy disk in the disk drive.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Press the [Song/File] button.  
Touch <File>.  
If not handled with care, a  
floppy disk can be damaged,  
or the data on it become  
corrupted, making playback  
impossible. We recommend  
saving your songs on two  
different floppy disks.  
Touch <Save>.  
The following Save Songscreen appears.  
fig.d-songsave.eps_60  
When you want to clear all of  
the content saved to the  
Favoritesand restore the  
condition on the KR105, refer  
to Formatting the User  
Memory(p. 139).  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Determining the name of the song to be saved  
4.  
Touch <Rename>.  
The following Rename screenappears.  
fig.d-songname.eps_60  
When you touch  
, the cursor moves.  
When you touch the icon for the letter or character to be input, the character appears  
at the cursor location. For example touching <ABC> in succession cycles you  
through the available choices in that character group (ABC...).  
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters through English (upper case),”  
English (lower case),” “numerals,” “symbols,then back to English (upper case).”  
When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor position is deleted.  
When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor position.  
5.  
When you have finished with the name, touch <Exit>.  
Determining the Save Destination  
6.  
7.  
Touch <Disk> or <Favorites>.  
Touch <Disk> if you are saving to a floppy disk; touch <Favorites> if you are saving  
to Favorites.  
Touch  
to select the save-destination song number.  
If a song name is displayed with a number a song is already saved to that number.  
If you select a number with a previously saved song and then proceed to save a new  
song, the previously saved song will be erased. If you do not want to lose a saved  
song, select a number with no song name indicated in the save-destination column.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting the tone compatibility format (when saving to disks)  
8.  
Touch <KR> or <MT>.  
Some Tones are unique to the KR105. Data that is recorded using these tones may  
not play back correctly on other Roland Digital Pianos or Music Players. When you  
want to save data so that it can be played back on another devices, save the data with  
MTset as the Tone compatibility format.  
Display  
Explanation  
The song is saved as data capable of reproducing performances with richness  
of expression using the KR105s special Tones.  
KR  
Data is saved in a form that can also be played on the Roland Digital Pianos or  
Music Players other than the KR105.  
You can listen to songs saved in this format on the Roland HP-G/R series and  
KR series keyboards as well as on Roland MT series devices.  
MT  
<Note>  
When data saved with MTas the Tone compatibility format is played back on this  
instrument, some of the nuances that were part of the performance at the time the  
data was recorded may be altered.  
Even with data saved with MTas the Tone compatibility format, an exact  
reproduction of the original performance may be unobtainable when using GS  
devices other than Roland Pianos and Music Players.  
NOTE  
You can only save songs in one  
format on a single floppy disk.  
Save  
9.  
Touch <Save> or <As SMF> to start saving.  
The resulting file format will be different depending on whether <Save> or <As  
SMF> is chosen, as described below.  
NOTE  
Never turn off the power  
while the saving operation is  
in progress. Doing so will  
damage the KR105s internal  
memory, making it unusable.  
Display  
Explanation  
Saves the song in KR105 format. You can listen to songs saved in this  
format on the Roland HP-G/R series and KR series keyboards as well as  
Save  
Saves the song as an SMF (Standard MIDI Files). Songs saved in this SMF  
format can be listened to on many instruments that can play SMF music  
files (p. 168).  
A song recorded using commercial music files cant be saved in Save As  
SMFformat for reasons of copyright protection.  
Its a good idea to get into the  
habit of moving the write-  
protect tab on the floppy disk  
to the Protectposition when  
youve finished saving your  
data. Keeping the tab at  
Protectprevents operations  
that could erase your songs by  
mistake.  
Save As SMF  
The time required for saving ranges from several seconds to half a minute or more.  
Dont take the floppy disk out of the disk drive until the saving process is finished.  
Touch <Exit> to return to the Song File screen.  
NOTE  
Depending on the playback  
instrument, some notes may  
drop out or sound different.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Deleting Saved Songs  
This deletes songs that have been saved on floppy disks, or to Favorites. To delete a  
song on a floppy disk, first insert the floppy disk in the disk drive.  
1.  
2.  
Press the [Song/File] button.  
Touch <File>.  
The Song File screenappears.  
3.  
Touch <Delete>.  
A Delete Song screenappears.  
fig.d-songdel.eps_60  
4.  
Touch <Disk> or <Favorites>.  
Touch <Disk> if you are deleting a song from a floppy disk; touch <Favorites> if you  
are deleting a song from Favorites.  
5.  
6.  
Touch  
to select the song to be deleted.  
Touch <Delete>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.m-filedel.eps_60  
NOTE  
7.  
Touch <OK>.  
Never turn off the power  
while the operation is in  
progress. Doing so will  
damage the KR105s internal  
memory, making it unusable.  
The selected song is deleted.  
Do not eject the floppy disk from the disk drive until the operation is finished.  
Touching <Cancel> cancels the operation.  
Touch <Exit> to return to the Song File screen.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Copying Songs on Disks to Favorites  
You can take songs saved on floppy disks and copy them to Favorites.  
You can also copy songs in Favorites to floppy disks.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Insert the disk with the song to be copied in the disk drive.  
Press the [Song/File] button.  
Touch <File>.  
Touch <Copy>.  
The following Copy Song screenappears.  
fig.d-songcopy.eps_60  
Specifying the Copy Source  
Touch the <Disk>  
5.  
to select the song you want to copy.  
When Copy Allis selected, all of the songs on the disk are copied to Favorites.  
Specifying the Copy Destination  
6.  
Touch <Favorites>  
to select the copy destination for the song.  
If a song name is displayed with a number, a song is already saved to that number.  
If you select a number with previously saved song data and proceed to copy to that  
location, the previously saved song will be erased. If you dont want to erase a  
previously saved song, choose a number with no song name appears in the  
destination column.  
NOTE  
Never turn off the power  
while the operation is in  
progress. Doing so will  
damage the KR105s internal  
memory, making it unusable.  
7.  
Touch <Execute>.  
Do not eject the floppy disk from the disk drive until the copy is finished.  
The song from the disk is copied to Favorites.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
I Copying Songs Saved in Favorites to Disks  
Songs thatve been saved to Favorites can be copied onto floppy disks.  
In this case, in the Copy Song screenin Step 4 above, touch the large arrow icon in  
the center to point the arrow upwards. This sets the KR105 to copy the song in  
Favorites to the floppy disk.  
fig.d-songcopy2.eps_60  
The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying songs from floppy  
disks to Favorites.  
Some song data cannot copy  
because they are copy  
protected.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. User Program Registration  
Determining the name of the User Programs  
Saving Performance Settings  
(User Program)  
4. Touch <Rename>.  
A Rename screenlike the following appears.  
Any collection of settings, including those describing the  
current status of your data selections or settings Automatic  
Accompaniment, can be saved to the [User Program] button.  
You can then call up the stored settings by pressing the [User  
Program] button. Saving your preferred combinations of  
Music Styles and Tones, as well as other frequently used  
settings, makes it more convenient.  
You can register up to 36 User Programs to the KR105.  
fig.panel_UPG  
When you touch  
, the cursor moves.  
When you touch the icon for the character to be input,  
the character appears of the cursor potion.  
For example, touching the <ABC> icon in succession  
cycles you through the available choices in that character  
group (ABCA...).  
¡For more on what can be registered to a User Program, refer to  
“Parameters Stored in the User Program” (p. 167).  
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters  
through English (upper case),” “English (lower case),”  
numerals,” “symbols,then back to English (upper  
case).”  
1. Set the Music Style, Tone, and other data until the  
settings are the way you want them.  
2. Press the [User Program] button.  
When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor  
position is deleted.  
A User Program screenlike the one shown below  
appears.  
When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor  
position.  
5. When you have finished with the name, touch <Exit>.  
Youre returned to the Write User Program screen.  
Determining the Write Destination  
6. Touch  
number.  
7. Touch <Write>.  
to select the write-destination  
3. Touch <Write>.  
The current performance settings are saved to the  
[User Program] button.  
A Write User Program screenlike the following  
appears.  
¡Never turn off the power while the display indicates  
<Writing...>. Doing so will damage the KR105’s internal  
memory, making it unusable.P  
¡You can restore the content registered to the [User Program]  
button to the original factory settings. Refer to “Restoring the  
Factory Settings (Factory Reset)” (p. 138).  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Calling Up Saved User  
Programs  
You can easily call up settings saved to the [User Program]  
button.  
Saving the User Program Sets  
You can take the 36 User Programs saved to the [User  
Program] button and save them as a set to a floppy disk, or to  
user memory.  
1. Press the [User Program] button.  
The User Program screenappears.  
Touch the scroll bar and drag up or down to scroll  
through the screen and display other name of User  
Programs.  
¡For more on working with the disk drive, refer to “Using  
Floppy Disks” (p. 85).  
1. Press the [User Program] button.  
2. Touch <File>.  
Touch the page icons <  
> <  
> to change pages.  
3. Touch <Save>.  
2. Touch the name of the User Program you want to call  
A Save User Program screenlike the following  
up.  
appears.  
When you touch the name of the User Program, the  
buttons or other performance settings instantly change  
to the previously saved settings.  
I Changing the Way User  
Programs Are Called Up  
When calling up User Programs, you can prevent the settings  
for Automatic Accompaniment from switching by not  
touching the touch screen for a few moments.  
1. Press the [User Program] button.  
Giving a name to a set of User Programs  
4. Touch <Rename>.  
2. Press the [Option] button.  
A settings screen like the following appears.  
The Rename screen appears.  
When you touch  
, the cursor moves.  
When you touch the icon for the character to be input,  
the character appears at the cursor position. For example  
touching the <ABC> icon in succession cycles you  
through the available choices in that character group  
(ABCA...).  
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters  
through English (upper case),” “English (lower case),”  
numerals,” “symbols,then back to English (upper  
case).”  
3. Touch <Instant> or <Delayed> to select the setting.  
When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor  
position is deleted.  
Display  
Instant  
Explanation  
Immediately after a User Program name is  
touched, the Automatic Accompaniment  
settings also switch.  
When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor  
position.  
The Automatic Accompaniment settings  
switch after you touch and road the User  
Program name for a few moments.  
5. When you have finished with the name, touch <Exit>.  
Delayed  
Touch <Exit> to return to the User Program screen.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Determining the save destination  
I Loading Saved User Program  
6. Touch <Disk> or <User>.  
Sets  
User Programs that have been saved on floppy disks or in  
user memory can be called up, on an individual set basis, to  
the [User Program] button.  
Touch <Disk> if you are saving to a floppy disk; touch  
<User> if you are saving to user memory.  
7. Touch  
to select the save-destination User  
*
Note that calling up these User Programs results in the  
deletion of all User Programs currently recorded to the [User  
Program] button.  
Program number.  
If a User Program set name is displayed, a User Program  
set saved to that saved to that number is already.  
When loading a set of User Programs from a floppy disk,  
If you select a number with previously saved User  
Program set data, then save a new set of data to that  
same number, the older User Program set will be  
deleted. If you dont want to lose any previously saved  
User Programs, select a number in the save-destination  
column that does not yet have a name.  
¡For more on working with the disk drive, refer to “Using  
Floppy Disks” (p. 85).  
1. Press the [User Program] button.  
2. Touch <File>.  
Save  
3. Touch <Load>.  
8. Touch <Save> to begin the save.  
A Load User Program screenlike the following  
Touch <Exit> to return to the User Program File screen.  
appears.  
fig.d-upgload.eps_50  
*
Never turn off the power or eject the floppy disk from the disk  
drive while the operation is in progress. Doing so will damage  
¡When clearing the set of saved User Programs, refer to  
“Deleting Saved User Program Sets” (p. 96).  
Specifying the set of User Programs to be  
loaded  
4. Use the “Media” arrows to select “Disk” or “User”.  
Select Diskif you are loading User Programs from a  
floppy disk. Select Userif you are loading User  
Programs from the user memory.  
5. Touch the name of User Program to load.  
6. Touch <Load>.  
The confirmation message appears.  
7. Touch <OK>.  
The selected User Programs are loaded to the [User  
Program] button.  
*
Never turn off the power or eject the floppy disk from the disk  
drive while the operation is in progress. Doing so will damage  
the KR105’s internal memory, making it unusable.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Copying Sets of User Programs on  
Disks to the User Memory  
Deleting Saved User  
Program Sets  
You can delete individual User Program sets saved to floppy  
disks or in user memory.  
You can copy sets of User Programs saved on floppy disks  
and to user memory.  
You can also copy sets of User Programs saved in user  
memory and to floppy disks.  
1. Insert the disk with the settings to be copied in the disk  
¡For more on the use of the disk drive, refer to “Using Floppy  
drive.  
Disks” (p. 85).  
2. Touch the [User Program] button.  
1. Press the [User Program] button.  
2. Touch <File>.  
3. Touch <File>.  
4. Touch <Copy>.  
3. Touch <Delete>.  
A Copy User Programs screenlike the following  
A Delete User Program screenlike the following  
appears.  
fig.d-upgcopy.eps_50  
appears.  
fig.d-upgdel.eps_50  
Specifying the copy source  
4. Touch <Disk> or <User>.  
5. Touch <Disk>  
to select the set of User  
Touch <Disk> if you are deleting User Programs from a  
floppy disk; touch <User> if you are deleting User  
Programs from the user memory.  
Programs you want to copy.  
When Allis selected, all of the sets of User Programs  
on the disk are copied to user memory.  
5. Touch  
to select the set of User Programs to be  
Specifying the copy destination  
deleted.  
6. Touch <User>  
to select the copy destination  
6. Touch <Delete>.  
for the set of User Programs.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.msg_filedel  
If a User Program name is displayed, already a User  
Program saved to that number is already.  
If you select a number with User Programs data, and  
then copy data to that number, the previously saved  
User Programs are deleted. If you do not want to delete  
the saved User Programs, select a number in the save-  
destination column for which no name is displayed.  
7. Touch <Execute>.  
7. Touch <OK>.  
The set of User Programs on the disk is saved to user  
memory.  
The selected User Programs are deleted.  
Touching <Cancel> cancels deleting the file.  
*
Never turn off the power or eject the floppy disk from the disk  
drive while the operation is in progress. Doing so will damage  
the KR105’s internal memory, making it unusable.  
*
Never turn off the power or eject the floppy disk from the disk  
drive while the operation is in progress. Doing so will damage  
the KR105’s internal memory, making it unusable.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
I Coping Sets of User Programs  
Stored in the User Memory to  
Disks  
I Selecting the Pedal Used for  
Switching Settings (Pedal Shift)  
3. Touch <Pedal Shift>  
to select the setting.  
You can take User Program sets saved in user memory and  
copy them to floppy disks.  
Display  
Explanation  
In this case, in the Copy User Programs screen in Step 4  
above, touch the large arrow icon in the center to get the  
arrow to point up. This sets the KR105 to copy the User  
Program set in the user memory to the floppy disk.  
You can use a function assigned to the  
pedal.  
OFF  
The left pedal is dedicated to switching  
User Programs.The function assigned to  
the left pedal cannot be used.  
Left Pedal  
The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying  
sets of User Program set from disks to user memory.  
The center pedal is dedicated to  
switching User Programs.The function  
assigned to the center pedal cannot be  
used.  
Center Pedal  
Using the Pedal to Switch  
User Programs  
Touch <Exit> to return to the User Program screen.  
You can assign the function of the sequential switching of  
User Programs to the pedal. That way, each time you depress  
the pedal, the KR105 switches to the next User Program.  
I Sequential Loading of User  
Program Sets (Load Next)  
When using the pedal to switch your User Programs,  
you can also call up User Programs sequentially. This  
feature is called the Load Nextfunction.  
Great for use in concerts and similar situations, this allows  
you to prepare and save your User Programs in the sequence  
they are to be used, and then call up User Programs in the  
appropriate order while you perform, simply by depressing  
the pedal.  
3. Touch <Load Next>  
to select the setting.  
1. Press the [User Program] button.  
Display  
Explanation  
Switches Load Next off. The pedal does  
not allow you to select User Programs.  
2. Touch <Pedal> in the lower part of the screen.  
OFF  
A PEDAL screenlike the following appears.  
Switches Load Next on. The next press of  
the pedal after the 36th User Program has  
been called up does nothing.  
ON  
Touch <Exit> to return to the User Program screen.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5. Touch <Exit>.  
Simultaneously Switching  
User Program and  
The User Program screen returns to the display.  
Touch <Write> to save the setting to the User Program.  
For more detailed information, refer to Saving  
Performance Settings (User Program)(p. 93).  
Transmitting PC Numbers  
You can have PC (Program Change) numbers be transmitted  
to an external MIDI device when you switch the User  
Program on the KR105.  
You can register PC number settings to each of the User  
Programs, just as you can with button settings and other  
settings preferences.  
Calling Up the Performance Settings to Be Set  
1. Press the [User Program] button, then touch the name  
of the performance setting you want to set.  
Setting the Transmission of program changes  
2. Touch <Option>.  
3. Touch <  
> <  
> to switch the page to display  
the following screen.  
fig-upgPCset.eps_50  
4. Touch  
for the parameter and make the  
settings.  
Display  
Description  
This prevents the PC number from being  
transmitted (Off), or sets the transmission  
channel (Channel 116).  
Tx PC  
Channel  
Bank  
Select LSB  
Sets the Bank Select LSB.  
Sets the Bank Select MSB.  
Bank  
Select MSB  
Program  
Change  
Sets the Program Change messages (Pro-  
gram Numbers).  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7. Creating and Editing Songs  
Commercially Available Music Files  
Commercially available song file recorded in Rolands SMF  
Multitrack Recording with 16  
Parts (16-Track Sequencer)  
Multitrack recording allows you to listen to previously  
recorded material while continuing to add performances of  
other parts.  
format is also composed of sixteen parts.  
By loading the song file from the floppy disk and using the  
16-Track Sequencer, you can then also edit the song file.  
¡Although with commercially available Roland SMF music  
The KR105 is capable of multitrack recording of up to sixteen  
parts. Since each parts performance is recorded using one  
tone, you can layer performances, using up to sixteen tones  
for the data in one song. The function used to layer these  
sixteen parts, one at a time, is called the 16-Track  
data, Part 11 is included in the [2/Bass Accomp] track button,  
other tracks match to the corresponding Track buttons.  
*
With some commercially available music files, you cannot edit  
the data.  
Sequencer.”  
fig.16track.e  
I The 16-Track Sequencer Screen  
When recording with 16-track Sequencer, display the 16-  
track Sequencer screen.  
16-Track Sequencer  
You can record performances for up to 16 parts, overlaying them part  
by part, to create a single song.  
1
1. Press the [Menu] button.  
Flute Part  
2
3
4
The Menu screen appears.  
Bass Part  
Piano Part (left hand)  
2. Touch <16trk Sequencer>.  
Piano Part (right hand)  
¥
¥
¥
A 16-track Sequencer screenlike the one shown below  
16  
appears.  
16-Track Sequencer and Track Buttons  
In addition to the 16-Track Sequencerfunction, the Track  
Buttons(p. 69) are another of the units playing/recording  
functions.  
These five Track buttonsare used for organizing the 16-  
Track Sequencers sixteen parts. This allows you to use the  
16-Track Sequencer to add more sounds to performances  
recorded with the Track buttons, and make even more  
detailed edits of the songs.  
You can easily play back the original song data with the 16-  
Track Sequencer, mute parts by pressing the Track buttons,  
and more.  
Icon  
Description  
Touch to select the part to be recorded, or the  
part whose settings are to be changed. The  
Part you choose appears is highlighted.  
<1>-  
<16>  
The Track buttons correspond to 16-track sequencer parts as  
shown below.  
This Part to be played back  
Track button  
[R/Rhythm]  
[1/Whole]  
Part  
D (10), S (11)  
The Part not to be played back (Muted Part)  
1
[2/Bass Accomp]  
[3/Lower]  
2, 59, 1216  
Parts that do not have performance data re-  
corded to them.  
3
4
[4/Upper]  
Solo  
Mute  
Only the selected Part is played back.  
Since the 16-Track Sequencer records one tone to one part,  
you cannot use Layer performance (p. 25), Split performance  
(p. 26), or other such functions to record two or more tones  
simultaneously. Also, you cant record the performance with  
Automatic Accompaniment.  
This allows you to prevent the sound for the  
selected part from playing.  
The performance data for the selected part is  
deleted.  
Clear  
Part  
which you can make detailed settings for each  
part. For details refer to p. 100.  
When you want to record with Automatic Accompaniment,  
then you should use the Track buttons for recording. (Refer  
to Recording With Accompaniment(p. 78))  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Icon  
4. Touch  
the setting.  
for the corresponding item to change  
The Tone Set screen appears. For details refer  
to p. 101.  
Tone Set  
You can also change the values by touching each  
parameter slider and then using the dial.  
I Modifying the Settings of Each Part  
You can change the Tones and volume, as well as mute the  
playback, for each individual part in songs recorded with the  
16-track Sequencer and the internal songs.  
Display  
Description  
Volume  
Reverb  
Chorus  
Changes the volume level.  
Changes the amount of reverb effect  
applied to the sound.  
¡Because commercially available Roland SMF music files are  
also made up of 16 Parts, you can change the settings for the  
Changes the amount of chorus applied.  
Shifts the direction from which the sound is  
heard between left and right.  
(p. 54).  
Panpot  
Touch  
touch  
to shift the sound to the right, or  
to shift it to the left.  
1. Display the 16-track Sequencer screen (p. 99).  
2. Touch the screen to choose the Part for which you want  
to make settings.  
Change the settings for the selected Part.  
Whats Panpot?  
Panpot is the control that determines the placement of  
the sound in the stereo sound field between left and  
right speakers. By altering the Panpot setting, you can  
change the perceived location of the sound between the  
left and right speakers.  
Display  
Solo  
Function  
Only the selected Part is played back.  
Toggles playback of the selected Part to on  
or off.  
Mute  
Clear  
The performance data for the selected part is  
deleted.  
When you press the [  
(Play/Stop)] button, you  
hear what the song sounds like as you change the  
settings. When you press the [  
(Play/Stop)]  
*
When you touch <Clear>, a message asking you to confirm the  
deletion appears. To erase the recorded sound, touch <OK>. If  
you dont want to erase the recorded sound, touch <Cancel>.  
Once a performance has been erased, it cant be restored.  
button, playback of the song stops.  
5. Touch  
to make settings for other parts.  
3. Touch <Part> to make more detailed settings for the  
The Part name appears at the upper part of the screen.  
Change the settings for other parts as needed.  
selected part.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.d-16trpart.eps_50  
6. Hold down the [  
(Rec)] button and press the [  
(Reset)] button.  
This operation set the changes in the settings.  
The song can then be saved to a floppy disk or to user  
memory.  
If you do not want to delete a song after changing the  
settings for the individual parts, save the song to a  
floppy disk or to user memory (p. 87).  
*
You cannot save the settings that determine whether sounds  
for each individual part are played or not (solo and mute).  
You can change the Tone for the selected Part by  
pressing a Tone button while this screen is displayed.  
When selecting Part 10 or 11, you can touch <Drum Set>  
to select the drum set or effect sound.  
The Part name and tone name are displayed at the top of  
the screen.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
If the following message appears  
I Recording a Performance  
If you try to display another screen after youve changed the  
Step 1 Prepare for Recording  
songs settings for each Part, a message like the one below  
may appear.  
fig.m-songmod.eps  
Selecting the Song to Record  
1. Hold down the [Song/File] button and press the  
[
(Rec)] button.  
The following screen is displayed if there is any  
previously recorded performance or any song with  
changed settings.  
fig.m-songmod.eps  
Touch <OK> to change the songs settings.  
Touch <Cancel> to discard the changes youre made.  
I Getting the Most Suitable Part  
Tones for the Musical Genre  
(Tone Set)  
Tone Setis a function that automatically assigns the most  
Touch <OK> to delete the song.  
suitable tones for the selected musical style.  
If you want to overwrite while recording, select a song.  
Determining the Songs Beat and Tempo  
change the Tones to suit the ideas you have for your song.  
2. Press the [Metronome] button to select the beat (p. 32).  
1. Display the 16-track Sequencer screen (p. 99).  
2. Touch <Tone Set> in the lower part of the screen.  
¡You cant change a songs beat once its been recorded. If you  
want to compose a song whose beat changes partway through  
the song, take a look at Changing the Beat in the Middle of a  
Song (Beat Map)(p. 113).  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.d-16trtone.eps_50  
3. Press the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to set the basic  
tempo of the song.  
If you do not need the metronome sound, press the  
[Metronome] button once more.  
recording is made using the source songs basic tempo. To  
change the basic tempo of a song, please refer to Changing the  
Tempo of Recorded Songs(p. 114).  
3. Touch the screen to select a musical genre.  
4. Touch <Exit>.  
The 16-track sequencer screen appears.  
Tones for each part are assigned automatically.  
*
In some genres, some parts may have no tone assigned.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Step 2 Start Recording  
Changing the Recording  
Method (Rec Mode)  
You can use any of the four methods below to record with  
the KR105.  
If necessary, choose a recording method.  
For more on how to record, refer to p. 102.  
If you record for the first time, theres no need to select the  
recording method.  
Although you will normally be using Replace Recording,”  
where previously recorded material is erased when new  
sounds are recorded, youll find that you can record songs  
recording methods.  
Selecting the Part to Record  
1. Display the 16-track Sequencer screen (p. 99).  
2. Touch the number for the Part you want to record.  
Replace Recording (p. 103)  
Selecting the Sound to Play  
recorded as previously recorded material is erased.  
3. Use the Tone buttons to choose a Tone to play.  
After selecting a Tone, press the [Exit] button to call up  
Mix Recording (p. 103)  
the 16-Track Sequencer screen.”  
New notes are recorded on top of notes previously recorded.  
melodies over prerecorded accompaniment.  
You can only record drum sounds or effect sounds on  
Part D (10) or Part S (11). You can select drum sets or  
effect sounds by selecting Part D (10) or Part S (11) and  
touching <Drum Set>.  
Loop Recording (p. 104)  
Specified measures are recorded repeatedly, while new notes  
are combined with existing music. A convenient feature for  
creating rhythm parts. Loop Recording allows you to record  
percussion sound with each pass.  
Recording the Performance  
4. Press the [  
(Reset)] button.  
Recording will start at the beginning of the song.  
If you want to record from a point other than the  
beginning, use the [  
(Bwd)] and [  
(Fwd)]  
Punch-in Recording (p. 105)  
buttons to select another measure to begin.  
You can re-record only a specified passage as you listen to a  
recorded performance.  
5. Press the [  
(Rec)] button and watch the indicator is  
light up.  
¡Immediately after the power is turned on, Replace Recording is  
The KR is put in recording standby.  
selected.  
6. Press the [  
(Play/Stop)] button.  
A two-bar count-in sounds, then recording starts.  
*
You cannot use the performance pads when recording with the  
16-track sequencer.  
7. Press the [  
Recording stops.  
(Play/Stop)] button.  
When one part is recorded, continue by selecting and  
recording another part. Continue layering parts to finish  
recording the song.  
¡You only need to follow the procedure described in Step 1  
Prepare for Recordingwhen youre recording the first Part.  
For the second Part and after, you can skip step 1 and proceed  
from Step 2 Start Recording.”  
*
Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when the  
power to the KR105 is turned off. It is a good idea to save song  
data to a floppy disk or user memory. For more information,  
refer to Saving Songs(p. 87).  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Changing the Recording Method  
I Recording While Erasing the  
Previous Recording  
1. Press the [Menu] button.  
(Replace Recording)  
The Menu screen appears.  
fig.d-menu1.eps_50  
The recording process where previous material is erased as  
new material is recorded is called replace recording.This  
setting is in effect when you turn on the power.  
1. In the “Rec Mode screen” (p. 103), select <Replace>.  
Touch <Exit> to return to the Menu screen.  
Record the performance using the procedures described  
in Chapter 4 (p. 75), Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts  
(16-Track Sequencer)(p. 99).  
2. Touch <Rec Mode>.  
A Rec Mode screenlike the following appears.  
I Layering a Recording Over  
Previously Recorded Sounds  
(Mix Recording)  
You can record a performance layered over a previously  
Recording.”  
1. In the “Rec Mode screen” (p. 103), select <Mix>.  
Record the performance using the procedures described  
in Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons  
(Redoing Recordings)(p. 81), Multitrack Recording  
with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer)(p. 99), or other  
methods.  
3. Touch <Rec Mode>  
to select the recording  
mode.  
Display  
Replace  
Mix  
Recording Method  
*
After you have finished with mix recording, return to the  
usual replace recording mode.  
Replace Recording  
Mix Recording  
Loop  
Loop Recording  
Auto Punch-  
In/Out  
Punch-in recording of the interval  
between set markers  
Punch-in recording starting from the  
point at which the pedal, the  
Manual  
Punch-In/Out  
ton is pressed  
(Rec)] but-  
For more about Punch In Recording, re-  
fer to p. 105.  
You can add tempo changes to a  
recorded composition. See p. 114.  
Tempo  
4. Touch <Exit>.  
Returns to the Menu screen.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
5. Press the [  
(Play/Stop)] button to begin  
I Repeated Recording at the  
recording.  
Same Location (Loop Recording)  
You can record a specified passage over and over, layering  
sounds with each pass. This method is called Loop  
Recording.This is handy when recording a Rhythm Part.  
Recording starts from Marker A.  
When the song reaches Marker B, it then returns to  
Marker A, where recording continues.  
For example, use this method to make a Loop Recording of a  
four-measure segment. First record the bass drum, the snare  
drum next, then the hi-hat and so on, layering a different  
instrument onto the same four measures. After you have  
finished recording the four-measure rhythm pattern, you can  
then use the procedure in Copying Measures (Copy)(p.  
108) to create as many copies of the four measures as you  
need to complete your Rhythm part.  
Each time the recording is looped, the newest sounds are  
layered over previously recorded sounds.  
6. When you press the [  
(Play/Stop)] button,  
recording stops.  
*
After you have finished with loop recording, return to the  
usual replace recording mode (p. 103).  
Loop Recording Shortcut  
You can also use the method described below to set Loop  
Recording.  
Take a look at Setting Markers for Repeated Practice  
(Marker)(p. 70).  
If you havent recorded anything yet, then use Blank  
Recordingto create the necessary number of measures  
before placing the markers.  
Take a look at Setting Markers for Repeated  
Practice (Marker)(p. 70).  
If you havent recorded anything yet, then perform  
Blank Recordingfor the necessary number of  
What is Blank Recording?  
Blank Recording is recording a number of silent  
measures with no content.  
2. Touch the <Repeat> icon in the Marker screen (p.  
1. Set the basic tempo and beat of the song.  
70).  
2. Hold down the [  
(Play/Stop)] button.  
The indicators for the [ (Rec)] and [  
(Rec)] button and press the  
This sets the loop recording mode.  
Start a recording.  
[
(Play/  
*
After you have finished with loop recording, touch the  
<Repeat> icon in the Marker screenonce more to  
return to the usual replace recording mode.  
Stop)] buttons both light up, and recording starts.  
3. Without performing anything, record only the  
required number of measures, then press the  
[
(Play/Stop)] button.  
The indicators for the [ (Rec)] and [  
(Play/  
Stop)] buttons both go out, and recording stops.  
2. In the Rec Mode screen (p. 103), select <Loop>.  
Touch <Exit> to return to the menu screen.  
The recording method changes to loop recording.  
3. Press the [  
(Rec)] button.  
4. Press the Track button for the track to be recorded.  
The KR105 is put in recording standby.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
I Re-Recording Part of Your  
Performance (Punch-in Recording)  
Begin recording using the procedures described in  
Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing  
Recordings)(p. 81) or Multitrack Recording with 16  
Parts (16-Track Sequencer)(p. 99).  
You can re-record part of a passage as you listen to a  
recorded performance. This recording method is called  
Punch-in Recording.This convenient function lets you  
record over a specified points in a part as you listen to a  
prerecorded performance in another section.  
Up until the specified passage, the previously recorded  
performance plays back.  
User Punch-In Recording by the following two methods:  
When you reach the specified passage, sounds are erased  
as recording starts; begin playing now.  
Recording the Region Defined by Markers A and B (Auto  
Punch-In/Out)  
When you reach the end of the specified passage,  
recording stops, and the KR105 returns to playback of  
the previously recorded performance.  
Before you start recording, place markers A and B to  
define the passage you want to re-record. Make the  
setting for punch-in recording, and re-record just the  
passage between markers A and B.  
4. When you press the [  
(Play/Stop)] button, the  
song stops.  
Recording From the Point at Which the Pedal or Buttons  
Are Pressed (Manual Punch-In/Out)  
Starting Recording from the Measure  
You can play back a performance and depress the pedal  
at the desired place to start re-recording. Depressing the  
pedal a second time cancels recording and returns you to  
playback.  
Specified by Buttons and Pedals  
If using the Performance Pads or pedals, you must first  
change the function of the pedals and Pads. Follow the  
procedures in Assigning Functions to Pedals and  
When you use the Performance Pads or [  
(Rec)]  
and assign <Auto Punch-In/Out> to the buttons or pedal.  
button, recording begins when you press the Pad or  
button upon reaching a specified point in the song.  
When you press the Pad or [  
(Rec)] button once more,  
1. In the Rec Mode screen (p. 103), select <Manual Punch-  
the KR105 exits recording mode and returns to normal  
playback.  
In/Out>.  
This changes the recording mode to Punch-In  
Recording a Passage Specified by Markers  
Recording.”  
Touch <Exit> to return to the Menu screen.  
define the passage.  
Following the procedures described in Setting Markers  
for Repeated Practice (Marker)(p. 70), use Markers A  
and B to specify the passage.  
Begin recording using the procedures described in  
Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing  
Recordings)(p. 81) or Multitrack Recording with 16  
Parts (16-Track Sequencer)(p. 99).  
2. In the Rec Mode screen (p. 103), select <Auto Punch-In/  
The previously recorded performance will be played  
back.  
Out>.  
fig.d-rec-punch.eps_50  
Recording begins when you press the pedal, the  
Performance Pad, or the [  
recording at this time.  
(Rec)] button; start re-  
Recording stops when you press the pedal, the  
Performance Pad, or the [  
(Rec)] button again, and  
the previously recorded performance is played back.  
3. When you press the [  
(Play/Stop)] button, the  
performance stops.  
This changes the recording mode to Punch-In  
*
When youre finished with Punch-In Recording, return to the  
Recording.”  
ordinary Replace Recording mode. Take a look at Changing  
Touch <Exit> to return to the Menu screen.  
the Recording Method(p. 103).  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4. Touch <Exit>.  
Composing an  
Accompaniment By Entering  
Chords (Chord Sequencer)  
You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen.  
5. Enter the chord progression and the accompaniment  
pattern.  
You can enter a chord progression and choose the places  
where the accompaniment pattern will change to create an  
accompaniment for a song. This feature is called Chord  
Sequencer.”  
Refer to Inputting Chords with the Chord Sequencer.”  
6. When you have finished inputting all the data, touch  
<Execute>.  
The accompaniment youve composed is registered at 0:  
Thanks to the chord sequencer, you can create an  
accompaniment ahead of time and play along with your  
right hand.  
New Song.”  
When storage of the data is complete, return to the Menu  
screen.  
1. Press the [Menu] button and watch the indicator light  
Now, press the [  
(Play/Stop)] button, and try  
up.  
playing the melody along with the accompaniment you  
created.  
The Menu screen appears.  
2. Touch <Chord Sequencer>.  
*
Songs youve created are discarded as soon as you turn off the  
power. If you do not want to delete the song, save it to a floppy  
disk or to user memory. Refer to Saving Songs(p. 87).  
The screen like the one shown below is called Chord  
Sequencer screen.”  
fig.d-chordseq.eps_50  
Inputting Chords with the Chord Sequencer  
This is the cursor.The cursor shows  
where the chord change or other infor-  
mation is input.  
This is the end of the song. When continu-  
ing to add input, insert measures by touch-  
ing <Ins>.  
Change the accompaniment arrangements  
Move the cursor  
Select the accompaniment pattern (Division)  
1. Use the dial to move the cursor to the input position.  
Use the [ (Bwd)] and [ (Fwd)] buttons to move  
This indicates the position where the accompaniment pattern (Divi-  
sion) or the Style Orchestrator changes.  
the cursor one measure at a time.  
2. Enter the chord progression and the changes in the  
Display  
Ins  
Description  
accompaniment pattern and arrangement.  
One measure is inserted before the measure  
where the cursor is positioned.  
Just as when performing with Automatic  
Accompaniment, press the keys to specify a chord, and  
press a button to select the accompaniment pattern (p.  
46). You can change the Style Orchestrator with the  
Performance Pads (p. 48).  
The measure in which the cursor is posi-  
tioned is deleted.  
Del  
Allows input of chords without playing the  
keyboard. Refer to Inputting Chords with-  
out Playing the Keyboard(p. 107).  
Chords  
3. Touch <Ins> once to insert one measure before the  
measure where the cursor is currently positioned.  
All Clear  
Clear  
Deletes all of the data thats been input.  
If you touch <Del>, the measure where the cursor is  
currently positioned is deleted, while the measures that  
follow are moved forward.  
Deletes the data at the cursor position.  
Records the input chord progression.  
Touch this icon when you have finished in-  
Execute  
To remove what you have input, move the cursor to the  
position with input you want to delete, then touch  
<Clear>. This deletes the entered setting.  
3. Press a Music Style button or the touch screen to select  
¡You can only insert an intro at the beginning of a song. When  
a Music Style (p. 39).  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
you add an intro, the number of bars corresponding to the  
length of the intro is inserted automatically.  
Editing Songs  
There are many ways you can edit performances recorded  
using the KR105 Track button or 16-track sequencer.  
I Basic Operation of the Editing  
¡For instructions on assigning functions, refer to Assigning  
Functions  
Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads (Pedal Setting/  
User Functions)(p. 126).  
*
While songs are being loaded, the measure number in the  
upper right of the screen is highlighted (text and background  
are inverted). Start editing the song only after the measure  
number is no longer highlighted.  
Inputting a short Intro and Ending  
Assign Intro 2/Ending 2" to a pedal or pad.  
Inputting a Variationor Originalwithout a Fill-In  
Assign Original/Variationto a pedal or pad.  
Selecting the editing function  
Using the keyboard to input slash chords (such as Fm/C)  
1. Press the [Menu] button and watch the indicator light up.  
Assign Leading Bassto a pedal or pad.  
The Menu screen appears.  
Inputting a break somewhere within the song  
2. Touch <Song Edit>.  
Assign Breakto a pedal or pad.  
A Song Edit screenlike the following appears.  
Check the accompaniment you inserted  
fig.d-edit1.eps_50  
Heres how to play back as much of the accompaniment as  
you have input.  
1. Press the [  
(Reset)] button to return to the  
beginning of the song.  
2. When you press the [  
(Play/Stop)] button, the  
performance is played back.  
3. Playback stops when you press the [  
(Play/Stop)]  
3. Touch an editing function to select that function.  
button once more.  
For more detailed information, refer to the  
corresponding page for each function.  
I Inputting Chords without  
Playing the Keyboard  
You can use <Chords> at the bottom right of the Chord  
Sequencer screen to specify chords on the screen.  
Function  
Undo  
Description  
Page  
p. 108  
p. 108  
p. 109  
Undoes editing operations that  
have been performed.  
1. At the Chord Sequencer screen, touch <Chords>.  
Copy  
Copies measures.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.d-chordinput.eps_50  
Evens out sounds in recorded  
performances.  
Quantize  
Delete  
Insert  
Deletes measures.  
p. 110  
p. 110  
Inserts a blank measure.  
Trans-  
pose  
Transposes parts individually.  
p. 111  
p. 111  
p. 112  
p. 112  
p. 113  
Erases data in measures, creating  
blank measures.  
Erase  
Part  
Exchange  
Exchanges the sounds in parts.  
Allows corrections to be made  
note by note.  
Note Edit  
PC Edit  
2. Touch  
in each to specify the chords.  
3. Touch <Execute> to enter the chord.  
Allows editing of the Tones  
changes that occur during a song.  
You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
¡PCstands for Program Change,which is a command that  
I Copying Measures (Copy)  
tells an instrument to change the sound its using. With songs  
that rely on the use of a variety of sounds, a PCneeds to be  
located at every point within the song where the Tone is to be  
changed  
You can copy a portion of a performance to a different bar in  
the same Part or to a measure in another Part. This is handy  
when youre composing a song that repeats a similar phrase.  
fig.e-copy.e  
Ex. To copy measures 5-7 to measure 8.  
*
Some edits cant be undone, not even by choosing Undo.We  
recommend saving songs to floppy disks or to user memory before  
editing. For more on how to save songs, refer to Saving Songs”  
(p. 87).  
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
7
2
3
4
5
8
9
10  
Editing  
At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function(p. 107), select  
4. Touch the item to be edited.  
The value for the item being edited is highlighted.  
5. Set the value with the dial.  
<Copy>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.d-e-copy.eps_50  
To cancel the operation once it is underway, touch  
KR105.  
6. When you’re done making all the settings, touch  
<Execute>.  
When you are finished editing the setting, return to the  
Song Edit screen.”  
Touch <Exit> to return to the Menu screen.  
I Undoing Edits (Undo)  
You can cancel an editing operation that youve just carried  
out. This is handy when you want to undo an edit and  
Item  
From  
For  
Content  
Measure number of the first measure of the seg-  
ment to be copied  
*
There are some edits that cant be restored.  
Number of measures to be copied  
At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function(p. 107), select  
Copy-source Track button or part number  
<Undo>.  
Choosing Allcopies all Parts. “—” appears in  
the <Dst> column.  
If you choose a Track button, you can only copy  
to the selected Track button. You cannot copy  
to the other Track buttons.  
Editing functions that can be undone appear on screen.  
fig.d-e-undo.eps_50  
Src  
Copy-destination measure number  
To  
When Endis selected, the data is copied to  
the end of the song.  
Times  
Dst  
Number of times the data is to be copied  
Copy-destination part number  
If you touch <Cancel>, the undo is cancelled, and youre  
returned to the Song Edit screen.  
If you touch <OK>, the confirmation message appears on  
screen. Touch <OK> to undone the most recent edit.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Item  
Content  
Item  
From  
For  
Content  
Data can be copied in the following three ways:  
Measure number of the first measure of the  
segment to be quantized  
Replace  
If there is a performance recorded at the copy  
destination, this previous recording is erased,  
and the copied data is written in its place.  
Number of measures to be quantized  
Track button or part number to be  
quantized  
Mix  
Tr/Pt  
If there is a performance recorded at the copy  
destination, the copied data is layered over the  
previous recording. If the Tones used for the  
copy source and copy destination are different,  
the copy-destination Tone is used.  
Choosing Allquantizes the same passage  
in all Parts.  
Mode  
Quantization timing  
Select one of the following values  
1/2 (half note), 1/4 (quarter note),  
1/6 (quarter-note triplet), 1/8 (eighth note),  
1/12 (eighth-note triplet), 1/16 (sixteenth  
note), 1/24 (sixteenth-note triplet),  
1/32 (thirty-second note)  
Insert  
Resolu-  
tion  
If there is a performance recorded at the copy  
destination, the copied portion is inserted with-  
out erasing the previous recording. The song is  
lengthened by the number of inserted mea-  
sures.  
When finished with the Quantize settings, return to the Song  
Edit screen.  
I Correcting Timing  
Discrepancies (Quantize)  
You can correct for timing discrepancies in a recorded  
performance by automatically aligning the music with the  
timing you specify. This is called Quantizing.”  
As an example, lets say that the timing of some quarter-  
notes in a performance is a little off. In this case, you can  
quantize the performance with quarter-note timing, thus  
making the timing accurate.  
fig.e-quantize.e  
Example: Quarter-note resolution  
Actual note data  
1
2
3
4
Note data after quantization  
Example: Sixteenth-note resolution  
Actual note data  
Note data after quantization  
At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function(p. 107), select  
<Quantize>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.d-e-quant.eps_50  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
I Deleting Measures (Delete)  
You can delete a part of a performance measure by measure.  
When a portion of a performance is deleted, the rest of the  
performance is shifted up to fill the gap. Erasing measures in  
I Inserting Blank Measures  
(Insert)  
You can add a blank measure at a location you specify. This  
addition of a blank measure is called insertion.”  
fig.e_insert.e  
a specified passage is called deleting.”  
fig.e_delete.e  
Ex. To insert measures (bars) 5-7  
Ex. To delete measures (bars) 5-8  
1
1
2
3
4
5
5
6
6
7
8
9
10  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
2
3
4
8
9
10  
At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function(p. 107), select  
At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function(p. 107), select  
<Delete>.  
<Insert>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.d-e-del.eps_50  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.d-e-ins.eps_50  
Item  
From  
For  
Content  
Item  
From  
For  
Content  
Measure number of the first measure of the  
segment to be deleted  
Measure number of the first measure of the  
segment to be inserted  
Number of measures to be deleted  
Number of measures to be inserted  
Track button or part number to be deleted  
Track button or part number where data will be  
inserted  
Tr/Pt  
When Allis selected, the same portion of all  
parts is deleted.  
Tr/Pt  
When Allis selected, blank measures are in-  
serted at the same place in all parts.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
I Transposing Individual Parts  
You can transpose specified parts and tracks individually.  
At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function(p. 107), select  
<Transpose>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.d-e-trans.eps_50  
Item  
From  
For  
Content  
Measure number of the first measure of the  
segment to be erased  
Number of measures to be erased  
Track button or part number to be erased  
Tr/Pt  
When Allis selected, the same portion of all  
parts is erased.  
Item  
From  
For  
Content  
Measure number of the first measure of the  
segment to be transposed  
Select from the following types of performance  
data to erase:  
Number of measures to be transposed  
All  
All performance data, including notes, tempos,  
Tones switches, volume changes, etc., are erased.  
Track button or part number to be transposed  
Tr/Pt  
Bias  
When Allis selected, the same portion of all  
parts is transposed.  
Tempo  
Tempo data is erased. Erasing the tempo data for  
The range of transposition  
You can select the range to transpose the data,  
from -24 (two octaves down) to +24 (two oc-  
taves up), adjustable in semitones.  
Event  
Prog.Change  
Erases the data for switching Tones (p. 108).  
Note  
Erases only notes.  
*
You cannot transpose performances of the drum sets and  
sound effect sets (such as the Rhythm Track).  
Except Notes  
Erases all of the performance data except for the  
notes.  
I Making Measures Blank  
(Erase)  
Expression  
Erases Expression (volume change) information.  
You can delete the performance data in a specified block of  
measures, turning them into blank measures without  
reducing the length of the song. This process is called  
erasing.”  
fig.e_erase.e  
Ex. To erase measures (bars) 5-8  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10  
10  
Blank measures  
Follow the steps in Selecting the editing function(p. 107) to  
choose <Erase>.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
I Exchanging Parts (Part  
I Correcting Notes One by One  
Exchange)  
(Note Edit)  
You can exchange the notes recorded for a particular part  
exchanging parts is called part exchange.”  
You can make corrections in a recorded performance one  
note at a time. This process of making changes in individual  
notes is called note editing.”  
You can make these corrections by using note editing:  
Deleting misplayed notes  
At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function(p. 107), select  
<Part Exchange>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.d-e-partex.eps_50  
Changing the force used in playing a single key (velocity)  
At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function(p. 107), select  
<Note Edit>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.e-note.e  
Touch each  
exchange.  
to choose Parts you want to  
Location  
Pitch  
Velocity  
The note-location display uses Measure: Beat: Tickas the  
format. A tick is a unit of time thats shorter than a beat.  
Touch  
to select the part with the note to be  
corrected. The Part number appears at the top of the screen.  
Use the [ (Bwd)] button and the [ (Fwd)] button or  
use < > < > in the upper part of the screen to find the  
note to be corrected.  
When youve found the note you want to correct, touch  
Pitchor Velocityfor the note.  
Use the dial to correct the pitch or velocity. If you want to  
delete the note, touch <Delete>.  
When youre done making all the settings, touch <Exit>.  
Return to the Song Edit screen.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
I Modifying the Tone Changes in  
Changing the Beat in the Middle  
of a Song (Beat Map)  
a Song (PC Edit)  
In some songs, the instrument sound changes during the  
course of the song (that is, the Tone changes in the middle of  
a Part). In such songs, an instruction to switch the Tone is  
inserted at the place where you want the sound to change.  
This instruction is called a Program Change(PC), and  
actions such as deleting program changes, or changing the  
selected Tone by them are called PC editing.”  
You can create songs that have beat changes during the  
course of the song.  
*
You cant change a songs beat once its been recorded. Before  
recording the performance, determine the beat to be used.  
1. Press the [Menu] button.  
The Menu screen appears.  
*
beat that does not contain a program change.  
2. Touch <Beat Map>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.d-beatmap.eps_50  
At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function(p. 107), select  
<PC Edit>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.d-e-pc.eps_50  
3. Use <  
><  
> in the screen or the [  
(Bwd)]  
and [  
(Fwd)] buttons to move to the measure  
whose beat you want to change.  
The measure number appears in the top-right area of the  
screen.  
Location  
Tone name  
The PC-location display uses Measure: Beat: Tickas the  
Touch <  
Touch <  
> to move to the beginning of the song.  
> to move to the end of the song.  
format. A tick is a unit of time thats shorter than a beat.  
Touch  
to select the part with the program change  
to be edited.  
4. Touch  
in each to set the beat.  
The Part number appears at the top of the screen.  
Use the [ (Bwd)] button and the [ (Fwd)] button or  
5. Touch <Execute>.  
The beat change starts with the measure you selected.  
Repeat Steps 35 to make beat settings in other measures  
as needed.  
use < > < > in the upper part of the screen to find the  
program change to be edited.  
Recording the performance  
When youve found the Program Change you want to  
modify, touch Tone Nameon the screen.  
6. Touch <Exit> twice.  
Press a Tone button to select a Tone group, then select a Tone  
with the dial. When selecting Part 10 or 11, select the drum  
set or effect sound.  
The screen displayed before you pressed the [Menu]  
button appears.  
7. Press the [  
(Reset)] button to return the measure  
If you want to delete the Program Change, touch <Delete>.  
number to 1.”  
When youre done making all the settings, touch <Exit>.  
Record the performance using the procedures described  
in Recording and Saving the Performance(p. 75).  
Specify the measure, then change the beat.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Changing the Tempo of  
Recorded Songs  
You can change the basic tempo of a composition. The basic  
tempo was initially set when the song was recorded.  
3. Touch the <Rec Mode>  
to select <Tempo>.  
This makes the setting for tempo recording.  
Touch <Exit> a number of times to switch to the screen  
where the measure number is indicated in the upper  
right of the screen.  
1. Press the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to choose a tempo.  
When the KR105 goes into Tempo Recording, the tempo  
indication is highlighted in white.  
2. Hold down the [  
(Rec)] button and press the  
[
(Reset)] button.  
Recording the Tempo  
The songs basic tempo changes.  
4. Use the [  
(Bwd)] and [  
(Fwd)] buttons to  
The change in basic tempo is discarded when you turn  
off the power or choose a different song. Save important  
song data to floppy disks or to user memory (p. 87).  
move slightly before the measure where you want to  
change the tempo.  
5. Press the [  
flashing.  
The KR105 is put in recording standby.  
(Rec)] button and watch the indicator is  
*
If the song youre working on has tempo changes, press the  
[
(Reset)] button to go back to the beginning of the song  
before you carry out this operation.  
6. When you press the [  
(Play/Stop)] button,  
recording begins.  
Changing the Tempo Within  
the Song  
7. When you get to the place where you want to change  
the tempo, use the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons or the dial  
to vary the tempo as desired.  
You can add tempo changes to a recorded composition.  
8. When you press the [  
(Play/Stop)] button,  
The KR105 stores song tempo information and performance  
data separately. Therefore, when making changes to the  
tempo in a song, you must record the changes in the tempo  
information independently of the performance data.  
recording stops.  
The songs tempo changes.  
*
You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording  
This recording of the tempo is called Tempo Recording.”  
mode. When youre finished tempo recording, go back to the  
ordinary Replace Recording. Take a look at Changing the  
Recording Method (Rec Mode)(p. 102).  
I Adjusting the Tempo While  
Listening to a Song  
You can add ritardando and other such gradual tempo  
changes.  
Setting the Rec Mode to Tempo”  
1. Press the [Menu] button.  
The Menu screen appears.  
2. Touch <Rec Mode>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.d-rec-tempo.eps_50  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
I Adjusting the Tempo at a  
Particular Measure  
You can create a tempo change at the beginning of a selected  
First, carry out Steps 13 of Changing the Tempo Within the  
Song(p. 114) to make the Tempo Recordingsettings.  
1. Use the [  
(Bwd)] and [  
(Fwd)] buttons to  
move to the measure where you want to change the  
tempo.  
The measure number appears in the top-right area of the  
Basic screen.  
2. Press the [  
flashing.  
(Rec)] button and watch the indicator is  
The KR105 is put in recording standby.  
3. Use the TEMPO [][+] buttons or the dial to change the  
tempo.  
4. Press the [  
(Play/Stop)] button.  
The songs tempo changes starts with the measure you  
selected.  
¡While tempo recording is being used to write tempo, the tempo  
display in the screen will be highlighted.  
5. When you press the [  
(Play/Stop)] button, the  
change in tempo stops.  
*
You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording  
mode. When youre finished tempo recording, go back to the  
ordinary Replace Recording. Take a look at Changing the  
Recording Method (Rec Mode)(p. 102).  
¡If you want to restore the previous tempo, delete the tempo  
data at the place where the tempo was recorded. For an  
explanation of how to delete the information of tempo settings,  
refer to Making Measures Blank (Erase)(p. 111).  
Tempo Recording Shortcut  
Hold down the [  
(Rec)] button and press one of the  
Tempo [-] [+] buttons to switch to the Tempo Recording  
settings. Record tempo information. In this case, tempo  
recording is canceled when recording ends.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8. Creating Music Styles  
I Creating New Styles by  
Creating Original Styles  
(User Styles)  
Although the KR105 features a variety of internal Music  
Styles, you can also create your own. These original Styles  
are called User Styles.”  
Combining Internal Music  
Styles (Style Composer)  
You can create a new style by selecting from among the  
Rhythm, Bass, Accompaniment 1, Accompaniment 2, and  
Accompaniment 3 parts in different Styles. This function is  
called the Style Composer.”  
You can use either of the two methods described below to  
create a User Style.  
*
You can only combine the KR105s built-in Styles.  
Style Composer  
Displaying the Style Composer Screen  
1. Press the [Menu] button.  
With this method, you combine internal Music Styles to  
create new Styles. You can create a new Style by selecting  
from among the Rhythm, Bass, Accompaniment 1,  
styles.  
The Menu screen appears.  
Style Converter (p. 118)  
Create a new Style by extracting the portions you need from  
songs composed with the 16-track sequencer.  
When youre composing a song, theres no need to specify all  
the chords. You can specify just some of the chords, and the  
KR105 automatically chooses the other chords and arranges  
the Style.  
2. Touch <Style Composer>.  
Style Converter features an Auto modethat allows you to  
easily create Styles from songs with a single chord, and a  
Manual mode,in which you create Styles from songs with  
three kinds of chordsmajor, minor, and seventh chords.  
*
If a User Style has already been recorded, a message like the  
one shown below appears.  
fig.m-styledel.eps  
Touch <Cancel> to return to the Menu screen. Save User  
Styles to floppy disks, or to user memory (p. 121).  
When you touch <OK>, the previously recorded User Style is  
deleted, and a new User Style is created.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A Style Composer screenlike the one shown below  
Deciding on a Style  
6. Touch <Execute>.  
appears.  
fig.d-stylecomp.eps_50  
You have created a new Style.  
The User Style is recorded to the Music Style [User]  
button. Try playing with the new Style.  
*
If you turn off the power or record a new User Style, any User  
Style youve previously recorded is lost. If you do not want to  
delete the Style, save it to a floppy disk or to user memory.  
Take a look at Saving a User Style(p. 121).  
Muting Parts for a particular division  
You can mute the sound of particular Parts in specific  
Divisions.  
Display  
Part  
R
Rhythm  
For example, have all of the parts play in the Variation”  
accompaniment pattern, while muting Accompaniment 2”  
and Accompaniment 3in the Originalaccompaniment  
pattern. With this arrangement, when the accompaniment  
B
Bass  
A1  
A2  
A3  
Accompaniment 1  
Accompaniment 2  
Accompaniment 3  
¡For more on Divisions, refer to the Style Arrangements(p.  
118).  
Icon  
Function  
1. Touch the screen to choose the Part you want to mute  
All Clear  
Deletes all of the settings.  
out.  
Parts in specific Divisions. For more in-  
formation, take a look at Muting Parts  
for a particular division(p. 117).  
2. Press the Fill In [To Variation] or [To Original] button  
Mute  
Clear  
to switch to the division that you want to mute.  
3. Touch <Mute> on the screen.  
Deletes the Styles in selected parts.  
The Part you chose is only muted out in the Division you  
selected.  
each part. For more information, take a  
look at Editing the volume and effect  
settings for each Part(p. 118).  
Part  
If you want to hear the muted-out Part, touch <Mute>  
again.  
*
To mute out a Division that changes after a few seconds (intro,  
ending, or fill-in), touch <Mute> immediately after switching  
to the Division.  
Records the created Style to the Music  
Style [User] button. Touch this when  
you have finished creating the Style.  
Execute  
Selecting the Styles assigned to each part  
3. Touch the part to be set.  
The Part you touched appears in reverse video.  
4. Press an Music Style button, then select a Style with  
the touch screen or the dial.  
When you have decided on a Style, touch <Exit> to  
display the Style Composer screen.  
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to determine the Styles for each  
Part.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing the volume and effect settings for  
I Creating a Style from a Song  
You Composed Yourself (Style  
Converter)  
each Part  
Displaying the Part settings screen  
You can take a song youve composed yourself and extract  
the portions you need to create your own original Style.  
When youre composing a song, theres no need to specify all  
the chords. You can specify some of the chords, and the  
KR105 automatically chooses the other chords and arranges  
the style. This function is called the Style Converter.”  
1. At the Style Composer screen, touch <Part>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.d-scomp-part.eps_50  
Style Converter features an Auto modethat allows you to  
easily create Styles from songs with a single chord, and a  
Manual mode,in which you create Styles from songs with  
three kinds of chordsmajor, minor, and seventh chords.  
When creating a song in order to create an music style, its  
good practice to consider the arrangement of the music style.  
Modifying the settings of each part  
Style Arrangements  
A Music Style is made up of five performance parts:  
Rhythm,” “Bass,” “Accompaniment 1,” “Accompaniment  
2and Accompaniment 3.”  
2. Touch the  
settings to be changed.  
to select the part with the  
The part name and Tone name are indicated in the upper  
part of the screen.  
A song progresses in predictable a sequence, such as intro,  
melody A, melody B, bridge and ending.  
With the KR105, such changes in songs are allocated to the  
following six performance states. We call these six parts of a  
song Divisions.”  
3. Touch  
for each parameter to change the value.  
You can also change the values by touching each  
parameter name and then using the dial.  
Division  
Intro  
Performance division  
Display  
Explanation  
The intro is played at the start of a song.  
This is played at the end of a song.  
This is a basic accompaniment pattern.  
Volume  
Reverb  
Adjusts the volume.  
Ending  
Original  
Adjusts the amount of reverb effect applied  
to the sound.  
Adjusts the amount of chorus effect applied  
to the sound.  
Chorus  
This is a developmental accompaniment  
pattern. It is a variation on an Original.  
Variation  
Changes the left-right direction from which  
the sound appears to come.  
This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a  
juncture where the mood changes. It is used  
to make a song more lively.  
Fill-In To  
Variation  
Panpot  
When you touch  
, the sound moves to  
to move the sound to  
This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a  
juncture where the mood changes. It is used  
to make a song more sedate.  
Fill-In To  
Original  
the right; touch  
the left.  
Finishing the settings  
You can make a song more lively or more restrained by  
increasing or reducing played parts by Divisions. You can  
also modify a song by changing the Tone of the parts in the  
Divisions.  
4. Touch <Exit>.  
The Style Composer screen appears.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A Style Converter screenlike the one shown appears.  
Creating Styles in Auto Mode  
Points to note when creating songs  
Use one of the major, minor, or seventh chords to create  
the song.  
It is convenient to record the sounds shown below for  
the Parts of the 16-track sequencer.  
Rhythm  
Bass  
Accomp Accomp Accomp  
1
2
3
9
Parameter  
Name  
Settings Content  
¡When using parts other than Part 2, 7, 8, 9, and D, refer to  
Changing an Extracted Part(p. 120).  
Conv.Mode  
Switches the mode (Auto/Manual)  
Creating songs  
Chord root for the segment to be  
extracted  
Chord Root  
Record the song after referring to Multitrack Recording  
with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer)(p. 99) and other  
related sections.  
Chord type for the segment to be  
extracted (major/minor/seventh)  
Chord Type  
Division  
From  
Division  
When using music data, first select a song (p. 54).  
Measure number of the first measure of  
the segment to be extracted  
Displaying the Style Converter screen  
2. Press the [Menu] button.  
For  
Number of measures extracted  
The Menu screen appears.  
Making the settings  
3. Touch <Style Converter>.  
4. Touch <Conv. Mode>, then use the dial to switch the  
*
If no song for use in creating a new Style is selected, the  
message "Please select a song" appears. Use the [Song/File]  
button to select a song (p. 54), then start the procedure again.  
mode to Auto.”  
This makes the setting for the Auto mode.  
5. Touch <Chord Root> and <Chord Type>, then use the  
dial to input the chord root and type for the segment to  
be extracted.  
*
If a User Style has already been recorded, a message like the  
one shown below appears.  
fig.m-styledel.eps  
6. Touch <Division>, then use the dial to select the  
Division.  
Display  
Intro  
Performance division  
Intro  
Touch <Cancel> to return to the Menu screen. Please save the  
Original  
Original accompaniment pattern  
User Style on a floppy disk or in the internal memory (p. 121).  
When you touch <OK>, the previously recorded User Style is  
deleted, and a new User Style is created.  
Fill To  
Vari  
From the fill-in to the variation  
Variation  
Fill To Ori  
Ending  
Variation accompaniment pattern  
From the fill-in to the original  
Ending  
*
Only one measure can be extracted when Fill To Varior  
Fill To Oriis selected for the Division. The number of  
measures may also be limited in other Divisions.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
When using music data, first select a song (p. 54).  
7. Touch <From> and <For>, then use the dial to select the  
measures to be extracted.  
Displaying the Style Converter screen  
Touching <Play> at the bottom of the screen, you can  
listen to performance of the portion which you chose.  
2. Press the [Menu] button.  
3. Touch <Style Converter>.  
8. Repeat Steps 57 to create Styles for all of the  
The Style Converter screenappears.  
Divisions.  
4. Touch <Conv. Mode>, then use the dial to switch the  
*
If no setting is made for a Division, it uses a simple drum pattern.  
mode to Manual.”  
Deciding on a Style  
9. When youre done making all the Division settings,  
After that, the steps are the same as for Creating Styles  
touch <Execute>.  
in Auto Mode(p. 119).  
The User Style is recorded to the [User] button.  
When you touch <Play> in the lower part of the screen,  
you can listen to the performance of the part selected  
with <Options>.  
*
*
If you turn off the power or record a new User Style, any User  
Style youve previously recorded is lost. If you do not want to  
delete the Style, save it to a floppy disk or to user memory.  
Take a look at Saving a User Style(p. 121).  
Changing an Extracted Part  
You can extract and change part of a song created with 16-  
track sequencer.  
The following data is saved to the User Style. If a song  
includes data other than this, the results you get might not be  
what was intended.  
1. At the Style Converter screen, touch <Part>.  
Keyboard performance data  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.d-styleconv.eps_50  
Amount of Reverb effect applied  
Amount of Chorus effect applied  
Creating a Style in Manual Mode  
When you create a Music Style in the Manual mode, you can  
clearly point up the differences in accompaniment for each  
individual chord.  
Points to note when creating songs  
Record your performance with the three chord types of  
diminished seventh, major, and minor.  
It is convenient to record the sounds shown below for  
the Parts of the 16-track sequencer.  
2. Touch the performance Part with settings you want to  
change.  
Chords Rhythm Bass Accomp Accomp Accomp  
3. Use the dial to specify which 16-track Sequencer  
1
2
3
performance part you want to extract.  
Major  
Seventh  
Minor  
D (10)  
3
2
4
5
6
¡In the Manual mode, the type of chords appear at the bottom of  
-
-
7
8
9
the screen. Set the Parts for all chords.  
12  
13  
14  
15  
4. Touch <Exit> to return to the Style Converter screen.  
¡If you want to use the performance of other part, check out  
Changing an Extracted Part(p. 120)  
Creating songs  
1. Use the 16-track sequencer to record the song.  
Record the song after referring to Multitrack Recording  
with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer)(p. 99) and other  
related sections.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A Save Style screenlike the following appears.  
Saving a User Style  
You can save the User Styles you create to floppy disks.  
With the KR105, you can save Styles to the user memory.  
When saved to the user memory, User Styles are not deleted  
when the power is turned off. You can also select Styles  
saved to the user memory by pressing the Music Style [User]  
button.  
You can save up to 99 User Styles in user memory.  
What is the User Memory?  
Determining the name of the Style to be saved  
The user memory is the area within the instrument  
where User Styles created with the KR105, sets of User  
Programs, and other such data are stored.  
4. Touch <Rename>.  
A Rename screenlike the following appears.  
fig.d-stylename.eps_50  
You can also copy User Styles and sets of User Programs  
saved on floppy disks.  
Data saved to the user memory is not deleted, even  
when the KR105s power is turned off.  
memory and restore the settings to the factory settings on the  
KR105, refer to Formatting the User Memory(p. 139).  
Preparations for saving data  
When saving to a floppy disk, first insert a floppy disk in the  
disk drive.  
When you touch  
, the cursor moves.  
When you touch the icon for the character to be input,  
the character appears at the cursor position.  
For example, touching the <ABC> icon in succession  
cycles you through the available choices in that character  
group (ABCA...).  
1. Press the Music Style [User] button.  
A User Style screenlike the following appears.  
fig.d-usrdisk.eps_50  
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters  
through English (upper case),” “English (lower case),”  
numerals,” “symbols,then back to English (upper  
case).”  
When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor  
position is deleted.  
When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor  
position.  
If the User Style screen is not displayed, touch <User/  
Disk> in the lower part of the screen.  
5. When you have finished with the name, touch <Exit>.  
2. Touch <File>.  
Determining the save destination  
3. Touch <Save>.  
6. Touch <Disk> or <User>.  
Touch <Disk> if you are saving to a floppy disk; touch  
<User> if you are saving to user memory.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
I Deleting Saved User Styles  
This deletes User Styles that have been saved to floppy disks  
or in user memory.  
7. Touch  
number.  
to select the save-destination  
If a Style name is displayed, a style is already saved to  
that number.  
When deleting a User Style on a floppy disk, first insert the  
floppy disk in the disk drive.  
If you select a number with a previously saved User  
Style and then save to that number, the previously saved  
User Style is deleted. If you do not want to delete the  
User Style being saved, select a number in the save-  
destination column that does not yet have a name.  
1. Press the Music Style [User] button.  
A User Style screenappears.  
If the User Style screen is not displayed, touch <User/  
Disk> in the lower part of the screen.  
8. Touch <Save>.  
2. Touch <File>.  
The saving process starts.  
3. Touch <Delete>.  
A Delete Style screenlike the following appears.  
fig.d-styledel.eps_50  
*
Never turn off the power while the operation is in progress.  
Doing so will damage the KR105s internal memory, making  
it unusable.  
4. Touch <Disk> or <User>.  
Touch <User> if you are deleting a file from user  
memory; touch <Disk> if you are deleting a file from a  
floppy disk.  
5. Touch  
6. Touch <Delete>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
or  
to select the Style to be deleted.  
fig.m-filedel.eps  
7. Touch <OK>.  
The selected Style is deleted.  
If you touch <Cancel>, the Style wont be deleted.  
*
Never turn off the power while the operation is in progress.  
Doing so will damage the KR105s internal memory, making  
it unusable.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Specifying the Copy Destination  
Copying Styles on Disks to  
the User Memory  
6. Touch <User>  
to select the copy destination  
for the Style.  
You can take User Styles saved on floppy disks and copy  
them to user memory.  
If a Style name is displayed, a style is already saved to  
that number.  
You can also take User Styles saved in user memory and  
copy them to floppy disks.  
If you select a number with a previously saved Style and  
then copy to that number, the previously saved Style is  
deleted. If you do not want to lose the Style being saved,  
select a number in the save-destination column that does  
not yet have a name.  
1. Insert the disk with the Style to be copied in the disk  
drive.  
2. Press the [User] button.  
7. Touch <Execute>.  
A User Style screenlike the following appears.  
fig.d-usrdisk.eps_50  
Do not eject the floppy disk from the disk drive before  
the copy is finished.  
The Style on the disk is copied to user memory.  
*
Never turn off the power while the operation is in progress.  
Doing so will damage the KR105s internal memory, making  
it unusable.  
I Copying Styles Saved in the  
User Memory to Disks  
If the User Style screen is not displayed, touch <User/  
Disk> in the lower part of the screen.  
You can take Styles saved in user memory and copy them to  
floppy disks.  
3. Touch <File>.  
In this case, touch the large arrow icon in the center of the  
Copy Style screenin Step 4 above so that the arrow points  
upwards. This will copy user memory Styles to the floppy  
disk.  
4. Touch <Copy>.  
A Copy Style screenlike the following appears.  
fig.d-copystyle.eps_50  
The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying  
Styles from disks to user memory.  
Specifying the copy source  
5. Touch <Disk>  
to select the Style you want  
to copy.  
When Allis selected, all of the Styles on the disk are  
copied to user memory.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
9. Various Settings  
4. Touch <Exit> to return to the Basic screen.  
Changing the Settings for  
One-Touch Arranger  
I Adjusting the Keyboard Touch  
(Key Touch)  
I Procedure  
1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button to  
keys.  
display the Basic screen.  
At Step 3 in Procedure, touch <Key Touch>.  
fig.d-p-key.eps_50  
2. Touch <Options>.  
Display  
Fixed  
Explanation  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.d-funcmenu1.eps_50  
Notes sound at an unchanging volume level,  
regardless of how lightly or forcefully you  
play the keyboard.  
This sets the keyboard to a light touch. You  
can achieve fortissimo (ff) play with a less  
forceful touch than usual, so the keyboard  
feels lighter. This setting makes it easier for  
children, whose hands have less strength.  
Light  
This sets the keyboard to the standard touch.  
You can play with the most natural touch.  
This setting is closest to the response of an  
acoustic piano.  
Medium  
Parameter Explanation  
Name  
This sets the keyboard to a heavy touch. You  
have to play the keyboard more forcefully  
than usual in order to play fortissimo (ff), so  
the keyboard touch feels heavier. This set-  
ting allows you to add more expression  
when playing dynamically.  
Refer to Adjusting the Keyboard Touch  
Key Touch  
(Key Touch)(p. 124).  
Heavy  
Sets the key at which the keyboard is divided  
Split Point  
(the split point) (p. 125).  
Selects the setting to be specified when the  
One Touch Program [Arranger] button is  
pressed (p. 125).  
One Touch  
Setting  
Touch any of the icons <Fixed>, <Light>, <Medium>, or  
<Heavy>, to set the key touch for the keyboard.  
Pedal Set- Assigns a variety of functions to the left and  
ting  
center pedals and the performance pads.  
To make fine adjustments, touch the slider in the screen.  
Arranger  
Config.  
Sets the way the Automatic Accompaniment  
plays sounds (p. 128).  
Move the slider to the right to add resistance, and to the left  
to make the key touch lighter.  
You can play classical styles such as Baroque  
using historic temperaments (tuning meth-  
ods).  
Tuning  
You set the tuning and make a variety of other settings for the  
KR105 starting with the second page of the settings screen.  
3. Touch the name of the parameter to be set.  
Refer to the corresponding page for each function.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
I Changing the Keyboards Split  
I Changing Music Styles Without  
Changing the Tone or Tempo  
(One Touch Setting)  
Normally, when you select a Music Style, the Tone and  
tempo settings suitable for that Music Style are selected  
Tone settings dont change when you change Music Styles.  
Point (Split Point)  
This sets the point (the split point) where the keyboard is  
divided when specifying chords in the left hand while using  
the Automatic Accompaniment and when playing split  
performances (p. 26).  
The setting is at F#3when the KR105 is powered up.  
fig.splitpoint.e  
At Step 3 Procedure(p. 124), touch <One Touch Setting>.  
fig.d-1touchset.eps_50  
F#3 (Split Point)  
B1  
B6  
Split Point Settings Range  
The key you chose for the split point belongs to the left-hand  
section of the keyboard.  
At Step 3 in Procedure(p. 124), touch <Split Point>.  
fig.d-splitpoint.eps_50  
Display  
Explanation  
Suitable  
Tone  
The suitable tone for a Music Style is select-  
ed automatically.  
Suitable  
Tempo  
The suitable tempo for a Music Style is se-  
lected automatically.  
Other  
Setting  
Other settings (Style Orchestrator, Part Bal-  
ance, etc.) are changed automatically.  
Touch each icon to switch individual settings on and off.  
All items are set to ON when you turn on the power.  
Parameters switched to OFF do not change, even when the  
Music Style is changed.  
Touch either <C3>, <F#3>, <C4>, or <F#4> in the lower part  
of the screen.  
The key you chose becomes the split point.  
To set another key as the split point, touch  
the screen, then specify the key.  
in  
You can set the split point within a range of B1 to B6.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Functions that Can be Assigned (Pedals,  
I Assigning Functions to Pedals  
and Performance Pads (Pedal  
Setting/User Functions)  
Performance Pads)  
Function  
Explanation  
You can assign a variety of functions to the left and center  
pedals and the performance pads. You can call up the  
assigned functions just by pressing the corresponding pedal  
Toggles the Leading Bass function* on or  
off. The function stays on as long as the  
pedal to which this is assigned is pressed.  
When assigned to a Performance Pad, this  
is alternately switched on and off each time  
the pad is pressed.  
Leading  
Bass  
or pad.  
925  
NOTE  
Only the Rhythm part is played. After No  
Chord is switched on, specifying a chord  
by playing the actual keys cancels the func-  
tion, and all of the accompaniment parts  
are played.  
Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-7/5; sold  
separately). By connecting any other expression pedals, you risk  
No Chord  
Break  
Assigning Functions to Pedals  
During the performance of Automatic Ac-  
companiment, the accompaniment stops  
for one measure only.  
At Step 3 of Procedure(p. 132), touch <Pedal Setting>.  
fig.d-pedalset.eps_50  
Fill In to  
Variation  
Performs the same function as the Fill In  
[To Variation] button (p. 46).  
Fill In to  
Original  
Performs the same function as the Fill In  
[To Original] button (p. 46).  
A fill-in is inserted, but the accompaniment  
pattern after that doesnt change.  
Fill In  
This plays a fill-in half a measure long,  
then switches to the Variation accompani-  
ment pattern.  
Half Fill In to  
Variation  
Touch <L><M> to assign functions to each of the pedals.  
This plays a fill-in half a measure long,  
then switches to the Original accompani-  
ment pattern.  
Half Fill In to  
Original  
Pressing the One Touch Program [Piano] button restores the  
piano performance functions to the pedals (p. 16).  
Original/  
Variation  
This changes the accompaniment pattern  
without inserting a fill-in.  
Assigning Functions to Performance Pads  
matic Accompaniment, the accompani-  
ment returns to the beginning of the  
Division (p. 35).  
Arranger  
Reset  
1. Press the [User Function] button and watch the  
indicator light up.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
Performs the same function as the [Intro/  
Ending] button (p. 43). Intro 1 and Ending  
1 are played.  
Intro 1/  
Ending 1  
Performs the same function as the [Intro/  
Ending] button (p. 43). Intro 2 and Ending  
2 are played.  
Intro 2/  
Ending 2  
Arranger  
Start/Stop  
Performs the same function as the [Start/  
Stop] button (p. 43).  
Orchestra-  
tor Up  
This changes the accompaniment to a more  
Orchestra-  
tor Down  
Changes the accompaniment to a simpler  
2. Touch <L><M> to assign functions to each of the  
Turns the Melody Intelligence function on  
and off (p. 49).  
Melody  
Intelligence  
Performance Pads.  
If you set the pedal as a dedicated switch for selecting User  
Programs, the function assigned to the pedal cannot be used.  
Refer to Using the Pedal to Switch User Programs(p. 97).  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Functions that Can be Assigned (Pedals  
Function  
Explanation  
Only)  
This starts Automatic Accompaniment  
with a fade-in (where the volume gets pro-  
gressively louder), ends it with a fade-out  
(where the volume gets progressively soft-  
er), then stops.  
Function  
Explanation  
Fade In/Out  
Pressing the pedal during playback of a song  
stops the playback. When the pedal is  
released, playback resumes from the beginning  
of the measure that was playing when the ped-  
al was pressed. When the pedal is pressed in  
rapid succession, the playback will resume  
backs up the same number of measures as the  
Rotary Slow/ This switches the speed of the rotary effect*  
Fast  
when you perform with an organ tone.  
Replay  
While the pedal or Performance Pad is held  
down, the pitch of the sound drops tempo-  
rarily, returning to the original pitch when  
the pedal or Pad is released. This can be ef-  
fective for simulating the performance of  
Glide  
Upper Sos- The pedal functions as a sostenuto pedal  
tenuto (p. 16).  
Composer  
Play/Stop  
Performs the same function as the [  
(Play/Stop)] button (p. 54).  
Upper Soft The pedal functions as a soft pedal (p. 16).  
Applies a damper pedal effect to the sounds in  
the left-hand side of the keyboard during a split  
performance.  
Lower  
Damper  
Press the pedal or the Pad turns the nota-  
tion appearing on the KR105 display to the  
next page while the performance of a song  
is stopped.  
Page  
Fwd  
This raises the pitch of notes you play on the  
keyboard.  
Bend Up  
Press the pedal or the Pad turns the nota-  
tion appearing on the KR105 display to the  
preceding page while the performance of a  
song is stopped.  
Page  
Bwd  
This lowers the pitch of notes you play on the  
keyboard.  
Bend Down  
When the pedal is pressed during a layer per-  
formance, the Tone volume changes between  
two levels, depending on how firmly the pedal  
During Punch-in Recording, this starts and  
stops recording (p. 105).  
Punch In/Out  
is pressed.  
You can set the tempo according to the in-  
terval at which the pedal or pad is pressed  
(p. 67).  
Pedal EX1  
Tap  
Tempo  
Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX1selected  
increases the Layer Tone volume. The Layer  
Tone is played at a fixed volume, regardless of  
how forcefully the keys are played.  
* What is the leading bass function?  
Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX2selected  
increases the Layer Tone volume.The Layer  
Tone is played at a fixed volume, regardless of  
how forcefully the keys are played.  
The function that sounds the lowest note of a fingered chord  
as the bass tone is called Leading Bass.When this function  
is turned on, the Bass Tone changes when chord inversions  
are used. Usually the tonic of the chord you play sounds as  
the bass tone.  
Pedal EX2  
Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX3selected  
increases the Layer Tone volume, while the  
Pedal EX3 volume of the left-hand Tone is decreased. The  
Layer Tone is played at a fixed volume, regard-  
less of how forcefully the keys are played.  
* What is the rotary effect?  
This adds a sort of spinning effect to the organ sound, similar  
to the sound when a rotary speaker is used.  
Changing the speed increases or decreases the speed of this  
spinning effect.  
Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX4selected  
Pedal EX4 increases the Layer Tone volume, while the  
volume of the right-hand Tone is decreased.  
NOTE  
The effect may not be applied correctly when you press a pedal  
if Pedal EX14is assigned to more than one pedal.  
Using the Bend Upor Bend Downfunction during a split  
pitch can change when the Bender effect is used is called the  
bend range; refer to Changing the Bend Range (Pedal  
Setting).  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
I Changing the Bend Range  
I Changing How Chords Are  
Played and Specified  
(Arranger Config)  
(Pedal Setting)  
The effect of smoothly raising or lowering the pitch of a  
played note is called the bender effect.”  
This changes the settings determining how Music Styles are  
played, and how the keys are pressed to specify chords.  
With the KR105, you can assign the bender function to a  
pedal, then apply the bender effect by depressing and  
releasing the pedal.  
When the Automatic Accompaniment is stopped, and Sync  
Start (p. 43) is turned off, chords are produced when you  
play in the left-hand side of the keyboard. This is called the  
same time is called the bass tone.”  
You can also make a setting that determines how much the  
pitch of the note changes when you apply the bender. The  
range.”  
At Step 3 Procedure(p. 124), touch <Pedal Setting>.  
fig.d-pedalset.eps_50  
At Step 3 Procedure(p. 124), touch <Arranger Config>.  
fig.d-arrset.eps_50  
Touch <Bend Range>  
setting.  
to adjust the bend range  
Touch <L><M> of each item to make settings.  
Parameter  
Name  
Value  
Explanation  
You can set this to any value within a range of 1 to 12 (in  
half-tone steps, up to one octave).  
All Music Style parts  
are played.  
Accomp  
Chord&Bs  
Accomp  
Only chord Tones,  
and bass Tones are  
played.  
OFF,  
Acoustic Bs.,  
A. Bass+Cymbl,  
Fingered Bs.,  
Picked Bass.,  
Fretless Bs.,  
Slap Bass1,  
Selects the bass Tone.  
When set to OFF,”  
no tone is played.  
Bass Tone  
Organ Bass,  
Synth Bass 101,  
Thum Voice  
OFF, E.Piano 1,  
E. Piano 2,  
Soft E. Piano,  
Hard E. Piano,  
Slow Strings,  
Strings,  
Selects the chord  
Tone. When set to  
OFF,no tone is  
played.  
Chord Tone  
Choir,  
Doos Voice  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Parameter  
Name  
Value  
Explanation  
¥ Intelligence 2  
Major  
The function that al-  
lows the KR105 to rec-  
ognize  
C
Play the chord root.  
accompaniment  
chords when you  
press only one or two  
keys during automat-  
ic accompaniment is  
called the Chord In-  
telligence function.  
When set to OFF,  
play all of the notes to  
specify chords.  
Seventh  
Chord Intel.  
ON, OFF  
C 7  
Play the root of the chord and the  
white key to the left of the root.  
Minor  
C m  
Play the root of the chord and the  
black key to the left of the root.  
What is Chord Intelligence?  
Chord Intelligence(p. 37) is the name of the function that  
recognizes the chords being specified for an accompaniment  
when only one or two keys of the chords have been pressed,  
which can be used while automatic accompaniment is active.  
Minor Seventh  
C m7  
Play the root of the chord and the  
black and white key to the left of  
the root.  
How to play chords in the Chord Intelligence mode:  
¥ Intelligence 1  
I Changing the Tuning (Tuning)  
Choosing the Tuning  
Major  
C
You can play classical styles such as Baroque using historic  
temperaments (tuning methods).  
Play the chord root.  
Most modern songs are composed for and played in equal  
temperament, the most common tuning in use today. But at  
one time, there were a wide variety of other tuning systems  
in existence. By playing in the temperament that was in use  
when a composition was created, you can experience the  
Major  
C 7  
Play the chord root.  
Major Seventh  
C maj 7  
At Step 3 in Procedure(p. 132), touch <Tuning>.  
Play the root and the rst key  
below it.  
Minor  
C m  
Play the root and the third key  
above it.  
Minor Seventh  
C m7  
Play the root, the third key above  
it, and the second key below it.  
You can choose from among the eight tunings described  
below.  
Diminished  
C dim  
Play the root and the sixth key  
above it.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
subtle variations in the reverberations of the chords you play.  
Tuning sys-  
tem  
Characteristics  
Touch the Stretch Tuning <ON> or <OFF> icon to select the  
tuning curve.  
This temperament divides the octave  
into 12 equal parts. All intervals will be  
slightly out of tune by the same amount.  
This setting is in effect when you turn on  
the power.  
When set to ON,the tuning curve features extended low  
and high ranges (Stretch Tuning). It is suitable for piano  
solos. This setting is selected when the power is turned on.  
Equal  
When set to OFF,the standard tuning curve is used. It is  
suitable when playing in an ensemble with other  
instruments.  
This temperament makes the 5th and  
3rd intervals pure. It is unsuited to play-  
ing melodies and cannot be transposed,  
but is capable of beautiful sonorities.  
Just (Maj)  
Just intonation differs between major  
and minor keys. The same results as ma-  
jor can be obtained in a minor key.  
Just (min)  
Arabic  
This tuning is suitable for the music of  
Arabia.  
This temperament is a modification of  
meantone temperament and just intona-  
tion, allowing more freedom of modula-  
tion. Performances are possible in all  
keys (III).  
Kirnberger  
This temperament is based on the theo-  
ries of the Greek philosopher Pythago-  
ras, and has pure fourths and fifths.  
Chords containing a third will sound im-  
pure, but melodies will sound good.  
Pythagorean  
This temperament is a partial compro-  
mise of just intonation in order to allow  
modulation.  
Meantone  
This temperament is a combination of  
meantone and Pythagorean tempera-  
ments. It allows you to play in all keys.  
(First method, number three.)  
Werkmeister  
Touch any one of the icons to choose the tuning system.  
When playing in a temperament other than equal  
temperament, you must specify the tonic (the note  
corresponding to C for a major key, or to A for a minor key)  
of the key in which you will play.  
Touch <Key>  
to select the tonic.  
If you have selected equal temperament, it is not necessary to  
select the tonic.  
Setting the Tuning Curve (Stretch Tuning)  
Pianos are generally tuned so that the low range is flatter and  
the high range is sharper than equal tempered pitches. This  
method of tuning is unique to the piano, and is known as  
stretched tuning.”  
A graph that shows the changes in pitch of actual tuning  
compared with the changes in equal temperament pitch is  
called a tuning curve. Changing the tuning curve produces  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Placing a Marker in the  
Middle of a Measure  
Changing the Settings for the  
Count  
A marker is normally placed at the start of the selected  
measure, but you can also set it so that a marker is placed at a  
position partway through a measure.  
Tempo Before You Begin Playing (Count In)(p. 68) and  
Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the Intro  
(Countdown)(p. 45).  
For detailed information about Marker, refer to Setting  
Markers for Repeated Practice (Marker)(p. 70).  
1. Press the [Count/Marker] button.  
The Count screen (p. 68) appears.  
1. Press the [Count/Marker] button.  
The Count screen appears.  
2. Touch <Marker>.  
The Marker screen appears.  
3. Touch <Option>.  
2. Touch <L><M> of each item to make settings.  
3. Touch <Exit> to return to the main screen.  
Parameter Name  
Value  
Count In  
(add a count before the  
performance),  
Countdown  
4. Touch <Resolution>  
to choose the marker  
setting.  
Count Mode  
Specify what type of count  
will be added.  
(add a count only before  
you begin playing),  
Count In/down  
(add both a count-in and  
a countdown)  
Indication  
Measure  
Explanation  
This lets you place a marker at the begin-  
ning of the measure.  
This lets you place a marker at the begin-  
ning of the beat.  
Beat  
Countdown Sound  
Specify the countdown  
sound.  
Voice (Japanese),  
Voice (English)  
5. Touch <Exit> to go back to the Marker screen.  
Countdown Track  
Lower & Upper Tracks  
Lower Track  
Upper Track  
Specify the track or part that  
will determine the beginning  
of the performance when  
added a countdown.  
Part 1~16  
Stick, Click, Electronic,  
Voice (Japanese), Voice  
(English), Wood Block,  
Triangle Castanets,  
Handclap  
Count-In Sound  
Specify the count-in sound.  
Animal  
Measures  
Specify the length (number of  
measures) of the count-in.  
1, 2  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
I Lid: Adjusting the piano tone  
Parameter Name  
Value  
With the KR105, you can simulate changes in tone of a  
opened or closed.  
Repeat  
When Repeatis turned ON  
on the Marker screen (p. 72)  
this specified whether the  
count-in will sound each time  
the range between the mark-  
ers is repeated, or only the  
first time.  
First, Every  
1. After performing steps (1)~(3) above, touch <Lid> to  
jump to the following page:  
Changing the Settings for  
One-Touch Piano  
I Procedure  
1. Switch to the Basic screen, or press the One Touch  
2. Use <L> and <M> to adjust the amount of the  
Program [Piano] button.  
openingof the piano lid.  
Each time you press the <L> button, the lid of the piano  
shown on the screen will open more, creating a brighter  
tone.  
Each time you press the <M> button, the lid of the piano  
shown on the screen will close more, creating a mellower  
tone.  
3. Touch <Exit> to return to the previous page.  
I Adjusting Resonance  
2. Touch <Options>.  
A Functions screenlike the following appears.  
fig.d-funcmenu2.eps_50  
(Resonance)  
You can adjust the resonance (Sympathetic Resonance)  
that becomes audible when the damper pedal is  
depressed.  
This setting is enabled only with the piano tones. You cannot set  
this for other tones.  
1. After performing steps (1)~(3) on p. 132, touch  
<Resonance> to jump to the following page:  
3. Use <><®> to selet the page that contains the  
parameter you need.  
4. Touch the field of the parameter you want to set.  
2. Use the on-screen slider icon or the dial to set the  
desired resonance level.  
3. Touch <Exit> to return to the previous page.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
I Changing the Tuning (Tuning)  
1. After performing steps (1)~(3) on p. 132, touch  
Tuning  
system  
Characteristics  
This temperament is based on the theo-  
ries of the Greek philosopher Pythago-  
ras, and has pure fourths and fifths.  
Chords containing a third will sound im-  
pure, but melodies will sound good.  
<Tuning> to jump to the following page:  
Pythagorean  
This temperament is a partial compro-  
mise of just intonation in order to allow  
modulation.  
Meantone  
This temperament is a combination of  
meantone and Pythagorean tempera-  
ments. It allows you to play in all keys.  
(First method, number three.)  
Werkmeister  
2. Press the fields of the desired tuning (see below).  
3. Touch <Exit> to return to the previous page.  
When playing in a temperament other than equal  
temperament, you must specify the tonic (the note  
corresponding to C for a major key, or to A for a minor key)  
of the key in which you will play.  
Choosing the Tuning  
You can play classical styles such as Baroque using historic  
temperaments (tuning methods).  
Touch <Key  
> to select the tonic.  
Most modern songs are composed for and played in equal  
temperament, the most common tuning in use today. But at  
one time, there were a wide variety of other tuning systems  
in existence. By playing in the temperament that was in use  
when a composition was created, you can experience the  
sonorities of chords originally intended for that song.  
If you have selected equal temperament, it is not necessary to  
select the tonic.  
Setting the Tuning Curve (Stretch Tuning)  
Pianos are generally tuned so that the low range is flatter and  
the high range is sharper than equal tempered pitches. This  
method of tuning is unique to the piano, and is known as  
stretched tuning.”  
You can choose from among the eight tunings described  
below.  
Tuning  
system  
Characteristics  
A graph that shows the changes in pitch of actual tuning  
compared with the changes in equal temperament pitch is  
called a tuning curve. Changing the tuning curve produces  
subtle variations in the reverberations of the chords you play.  
This temperament divides the octave  
into 12 equal parts. All intervals will be  
slightly out of tune by the same amount.  
This setting is in effect when you turn on  
the power.  
Equal  
Touch the Stretch Tuning <ON> or <OFF> field to select the  
tuning curve.  
This temperament makes the 5th and  
3rd intervals pure. It is unsuited to play-  
ing melodies and cannot be transposed,  
but is capable of beautiful sonorities.  
When set to ON,the tuning curve features extended low  
and high ranges (Stretch Tuning). It is suitable for piano  
solos. This setting is selected when the power is turned on.  
Just (Maj)  
When set to OFF,the standard tuning curve is used. It is  
suitable when playing in an ensemble with other  
instruments.  
Just intonation differs between major  
and minor keys. The same results as ma-  
jor can be obtained in a minor key.  
Just (min)  
Arabic  
This tuning is suitable for the music of  
Arabia.  
This temperament is a modification of  
meantone temperament and just intona-  
tion, allowing more freedom of modula-  
tion. Performances are possible in all  
keys (III).  
Kirnberger  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5. Touch <ON> to turn the Hammer Response function  
I Changing How Rapidly Sounds  
Are Expressed According to  
the Force Used to Play the  
Keys (Hammer Response)  
You can adjust the timing with which sounds are produced  
according to the force used to play the keys. This function is  
called Hammer Resonance.”  
on.  
When a key is pressed on an acoustic piano, it causes a  
hammer to move and strike the strings, producing sound.  
The hammers move more slowly when the keys are played  
gently, meaning that sounds are produced just slightly later  
than when you play the keyboard with greater force.  
Touch <OFF> to cancel the effect.  
6. Touch the screen slider to adjust the time it takes for a  
key to sound after it is pressed.  
When the Hammer Response function is on, the interval  
between the time a key is pressed and the time sound is  
produced varies according to the force used to play the key.  
The more gently the key is pressed, the more delayed the  
timing of the sound.  
The more the slider is moved to Slow,the more  
delayed the sound is when the keys are played softly.  
Conversely, sounds are produced more quickly when  
the keys are played with greater force.  
1. Switch to the Basic screen, or press the One Touch  
Program [Piano] button.  
I Adjusting the Resonant Sounds  
(String Resonance)  
When the keys are pressed on an acoustic piano, the strings  
for keys that are already pressed also vibrate  
resonance is called String Resonance.”  
1. After performing steps (1)~(3) on p. 132, touch  
<String Resonance> to jump to the following page:  
2. Touch <Options>.  
3. Use <><®> to select the following page:  
Touch <ON> to turn the String Resonance function on.  
Touch the screen slider to adjust the amount of effect  
applied.  
4. Touch <Hammer Response>.  
Moving the slider to Maxincreases the amount of  
resonance effect applied. Moving the slider to Min”  
reduces the amount of effect applied.  
Touch <OFF> to cancel the effect.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
I Adjusting the Keyboard Touch  
Other Settings  
(Key Touch)  
The following settings are shared by One-Touch [Piano] and  
One-Touch [Arranger]. Some of them can be found on pages  
3 and 4 for [Piano] as well as on pages 2 and 3 for [Arranger].  
Others can only be selected one one page, even though they  
apply to both [Piano] and [Arranger].  
keys.  
1. After performing steps (1)~(3) on p. 132, touch  
<Key Touch> to jump to the following page:  
Parameter  
Explanation  
136).  
Master Tune  
play (p. 136).  
Language  
Opening  
Message  
Sets the message that appears when  
MIDI Ensemble  
Refer to p. 145.  
User Image  
Display  
Selects the image data and display  
used (p. 137).  
MIDI Setting  
Refer to p. 146.  
Program  
Change  
Display  
Explanation  
Refer to p. 146.  
Notes sound at a constant volume level, re-  
gardless of how lightly or forcefully you  
play the keyboard.  
you want to use the beat indicator (p.  
137).  
Fixed  
Beat Indicator  
MIDI Sync  
Refer to p. 144.  
This sets the keyboard to a light touch. You  
can achieve fortissimo (ff) play with a less  
forceful touch than usual, so the keyboard  
feels lighter. This setting makes it easier for  
children, whose hands have less strength.  
Stores edited settings and other data to  
Memory Backup  
Light  
Restores the content stored with Mem-  
tings (p. 138).  
Factory Reset  
Touch Screen  
This sets the keyboard to the standard touch.  
You can play with the most natural touch.  
This setting is closest to the response of an  
acoustic piano.  
Allows for calibration of the touch  
screen (p. 139).  
Medium  
This sets the keyboard to a heavy touch. You  
have to play the keyboard more forcefully  
than usual in order to play fortissimo (ff), so  
the keyboard touch feels heavier. This set-  
ting allows you to add more expression  
when playing dynamically.  
Heavy  
Touch any of the icons <Fixed>, <Light>, <Medium>, or  
<Heavy>, to set the key touch for the keyboard.  
To make fine adjustments, touch the slider in the screen.  
Move the slider to the right to add resistance, and to the  
right to make the key touch lighter.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
I Changing Standard Pitch  
I Changing the Screen Message  
When the Power Is Turned On  
(Opening Message)  
when the power is turned on.  
(Master Tune)  
Standard pitchgenerally refers to the pitch that is heard  
when you play middle A. When performing in an ensemble  
with other instruments, adjust the standard pitch so that the  
At Step 3 in Procedure(p. 132), touch <Opening Message>.  
instruments to a standard pitch is called master tuning.”  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
At Step 3 in Procedure(p. 132), touch <Master Tune>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.d-tuning.eps_50  
Use  
to move the cursor.  
Touch <L><M> to change the pitch.  
When you touch the character icon, the character is input  
where at the position.  
Standard pitch can be set to any value from 415.3466.2 Hz.  
I Changing the Language  
When you touch the icon for the character to be input, the  
character appears at the cursor position. For example,  
touching the <ABC> icon in succession cycles you through the  
available choices in that character group (ABCA...).  
(Language)  
displaying information on the screen.  
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters through  
English (upper case),” “English (lower case),” “numerals,”  
symbols,then back to English (upper case).”  
At Step 3 in Procedure(p. 132), touch <Language>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor position is  
deleted.  
When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor  
position.  
When you have finished inputting the characters, touch  
<Execute>.  
NOTE  
Touch <L><M> to select the language.  
Available settings  
Never turn off the power while the display indicates  
<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KR105s internal  
memory, making it unusable.  
English, German, French, Spanish  
NOTE  
If you touch <All Clear> at the bottom of the screen and then  
touch <Execute>, the display reverts to the screen that normally  
appears when you turn on the power to the instrument.  
German, Spanish, and French are displayed for some functions.  
Other screens will be displayed in English.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
I Turning Off the Beat Indicator  
(Beat Indicator)  
The beat indicator normally flashes in time with the  
wish, it can be set to remain off at all times.  
At step 3 in Procedure(p. 132), touch <Beat Indicator>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
2. Touch the name of the stored image data.  
When you touch <Preview>, you can then show the  
selected image data on the display selected in Step 1.  
3. Touch <Save>.  
The selected image data is stored.  
4. Touch <Exit> to return to the previous screen.  
To clear the stored image data, touch <Erase>.  
Touch  
to turn the setting ON, or OFF (so the beat  
Image data that KR105 can display  
indicator remains off).  
I Selecting Images To Be Shown  
on the KR105  
Size  
320 x 240 pixels  
1 bit (2 colors)  
BMP format  
Color  
(User Image Display)  
shown on the onboard display.  
Format  
*
The KR105 cannot deal with compressed  
image data.  
At Step 3 in Procedure(p. 132), touch <User Image  
18 characters in length (lowercase is ok). A  
filename extension of .BMP(uppercase  
characters) must be added after the name.  
Display>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.d-usrimage.eps_50  
The following characters can be used to  
name an image.  
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U  
V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s  
t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 # $ % & ( ) -  
@ ~ { } ^ _ !  
Name  
*
If you use a character that cannot be used  
in a name, it will be replaced by another  
character when displayed.  
Selecting the images to be displayed  
First, take a floppy disk to which the image data stored  
in the KR105 has been saved, and insert the disk in the  
disk drive.  
1. Touch <File>.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
I Remembering the Settings  
Even When the Power is  
I Restoring the Factory Settings  
You can return the content stored with Memory Backup(p.  
138) and the User Programs (p. 93) to their original factory  
settings. This operation is referred to as Factory Reset.”  
Turned Off (Memory Backup)  
Normally, the various settings revert to their default values  
when the power is turned off. However, you can specify that  
the settings will be remembered even when the power is  
turned off. This function is called Memory Backup.”  
NOTE  
When you perform a Factory Reset, all settings that have been  
stored in memory up to then are erased and reset to their  
factory defaults.  
For more on the settings stored using Memory Backup, refer to  
Parameters Stored in Memory Backup(p. 167).  
At step 3 in Procedure(p. 132), touch <Memory Backup>.  
screen calibration settings to the original factory settings, refer  
to Returning the Touch Screen Calibration Settings to the  
Original Factory Settings(p. 139)  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
When you want to restore the content registered to the KR105s  
User Memory(p. 139).  
At step 3 in Procedure(p. 132), touch Factory Reset.”  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
Touch <Execute>.  
The confirmation message appears on screen.  
Touch <OK> to store the setting.  
When the setting has been stored in memory, the previous  
screen will reappear.  
NOTE  
Never turn off the power while the display indicates  
<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KR105s internal  
memory, making it unusable.  
Touch <Execute>.  
The confirmation message appears on screen.  
Touch <OK> to restore the original factory settings.  
When the setting is changed, the previous screen returns.  
When you touch <Cancel>, the settings are left untouched,  
and youre returned to the previous screen.  
NOTE  
Never turn off the power while the display indicates  
<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KR105s internal  
memory, making it unusable.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
I Calibrating the Touch Screen  
Formatting the User Memory  
The KR105 features an internal storage area where you can  
save recorded performances and User Styles. This space is  
called the User Memory.”  
(Touch Screen)  
If youve been using the touch screen for some time, the  
pointer may be shifted, making the KR105 react incorrectly.  
performing calibration (repositioning).  
The following content is stored to the user memory.  
Content registered to the Favorites(p. 59)  
Sets of saved User Programs (p. 94)  
At step 3 in Procedure(p. 132), touch Touch Screen.”  
User Styles saved on user memory (p. 121)  
Image files set with the User Image settings(p. 137)  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
To delete all of the content held in the user memory and  
restore the original factory settings, carry out the following  
procedure.  
1. Press the [Song/File] button.  
2. Touch <File>.  
3. Touch <Format User Memory>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
fig.d-touchpanel.eps_50  
Touch <Execute>.  
Touch the points indicated.  
NOTE  
Do this carefully, because touching a location thats different  
from the one indicated for the pointer may make the  
displacement even worse. Be sure to touch the pointer  
accurately.  
When the calibration is finished, touch <Write> to store the  
settings.  
4. Touch <OK>.  
All of the content in the user memory is deleted.  
If you touch <Cancel>, the deletion is cancelled, and  
youre returned to the previous screen.  
NOTE  
If you dont write them to memory, the calibration settings will  
be discarded as soon as the power is switched off.  
NOTE  
Returning the Touch Screen Calibration  
Settings to the Original Factory Settings  
Never turn off the power while the display indicates  
<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KR105s internal  
memory, making it unusable.  
If you touch <Factory Reset> in the above screen, the touch  
screen calibration settings revert to the original factory  
settings.  
than the user memory settings. To restore settings other than  
those for the user memory to the original factory settings, carry  
out Factory Reset (p. 138).  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Automatically Starting the  
Quick Tour  
You can set the instrument so that the Quick Tour starts  
automatically with no operation required.  
Disabling Functions Other  
Than Piano Performance  
(Panel Lock)  
The Panel Lockfunction locks the KR105 in a state where  
only piano performance can be used, and all buttons will be  
disabled. This prevents the settings from being inadvertently  
modified even if children press the buttons accidentally.  
1. Simultaneously press the [Transpose] and [Reverb]  
buttons.  
The Quick Tour screen appears.  
*
In the Panel Lock state, only the grand piano sound can be  
played.  
2. Touch <Option>.  
1. Turn down the volume all the way.  
2. Press the [Power] switch to turn off the power.  
3. While holding down the [Wonderland/Game] button,  
press the [Power] switch and turn on the power.  
Then, continue to hold down the button for a few  
seconds.  
All buttons except for piano play are disabled.  
Adjust the volume. When you play the keyboard, the  
grand piano sound will be heard.  
3. Touch <ON> or <OFF>.  
When set to ON,the Quick Tour starts when you turn  
on the power. The demo stops as soon as you carry out  
any kind of operation. If no operation is performed for  
510 minutes after that, the automatic demo starts again.  
To undo the Panel Lock function, turn the volume down  
to the minimum, and turn on the power once again.  
When set to OFF,the Quick Tour does not start unless  
you touch the Quick Tour screen icon.  
4. Touch <Exit> to return to the Quick Tour screen.  
*
For more information about Quick Tour, refer to the Quick  
Start.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
I Viewing Song Information  
Detailed Song Playback  
Settings  
(Information)  
You can view file names and other information concerning  
songs.  
I Changing the Tone Settings  
When Playing Back Songs  
(Play Mode)  
With the normal setting, GS tones (sounds that are  
compatible with other GS instruments) will normally be used  
to play back song data. By changing this setting, you can play  
back song using KR-specific tones for certain portions of the  
data.  
1. Press the [Song/File] button.  
2. Touch <File>.  
3. Touch <Information>.  
A song information is displayed.  
I Hiding the Lyrics (Lyrics)  
Some commercially available music files for use in karaoke,  
as well as some of the internal songs include lyrics data.  
When you play such music files, the lyrics automatically  
appear in the screen. If you do not want lyrics to appear  
automatically, set this to OFF.”  
For detailed information about GS, refer to About the KR105s  
Sound Generator(p. 168).  
1. Press the [Menu] button.  
The Menu screen appears.  
1. Press the [Menu] button.  
The Menu screen appears.  
Touch  
to switch the screens.  
2. Touch <Play Mode>.  
Touch  
to switch the screens.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
2. Touch <Lyrics>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
3. Touch the icon to choose the setting.  
Icon  
GS  
Explanation  
3. Touch  
to select the setting.  
Explanation  
Playback uses GS-compatible tones for perfor-  
mances that sound like other GS instruments.  
Display  
ON  
Playback uses KR105 tones for greater expres-  
siveness. However, differences may appear  
when playing back using devices other than the  
KR105.  
Lyrics are displayed automatically (when  
performance data containing lyrics is played  
back).  
KR  
Lyrics are not displayed, even if the song  
data being played back contains lyrics data.  
OFF  
4. Touch <Exit> to go back to the Menu screen.  
5. After changing this setting, try selecting the song once  
4. Touch <Exit> to return to the Menu screen.  
again.  
For more detailed information about selecting a song,  
Even when this is set to OFF,you can still have the lyrics be  
refer to Playing a Song(p. 54).  
displayed by touching <  
or Basic screen (p. 19).  
> when it appears in the Piano  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
4. Touch <Exit> to return to the Menu screen.  
again.  
The screen may be switched when you press the button while  
the Lyrics screen is displayed. To have the lyrics displayed  
For more detailed information about selecting a song,  
refer to Playing a Song(p. 54).  
again, touch <  
> on the Piano or Basic screen, or stop  
playback of the song, then press the [  
button.  
(Play/Stop)]  
I Changing the Parts Assigned  
to the Track Buttons During  
Normally, when playing back Roland Piano Digital-  
compatible SMFs (p. 168), the lower part is assigned to the  
[3/Lower] button, and the upper part is assigned to the [4/  
Upper] button. However, assignment of the upper and lower  
parts may differ with some SMF data.  
If you cannot get the upper and lower parts to work well set  
on Auto,then change the setting to 2/1 Partor 3/4  
Part.”  
This setting is effective with SMF format song data.  
This is not effective with the internal songs.  
1. Press the [Menu] button.  
The Menu screen appears.  
Touch  
to switch the screens.  
2. Touch <Track Assign>.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
3. Touch  
to select the setting.  
Explanation  
Display  
The part assigned to each track will be deter-  
mined automatically,  
Auto  
depending on the song data.  
Part 1 will be assigned to the upper part  
track, part 2 to the lower part track, and part  
3 to the user track.  
2/1 Part  
3/4 Part  
Part 4 will be assigned to the upper part  
track, part 3 to the lower part track, and part  
1 to the user track.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
10. Connecting External Devices  
fig.V-LINKkey  
You can connect the KR105 to external devices such as audio  
equipment, MIDI instruments and computer.  
A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1  
Connecting Video Equipment  
(V-LINK)  
A0 G1#  
Connecting the KR105 to a V-LINK compatible image device  
allows you to control the images with the KR105.  
While V-LINK is switched on, no sound is produced  
when you press any of the twelve keys at the left end of  
the keyboard.  
V-LINK (  
) is functionality promoted by Roland  
that allows linked performance of music and visual material.  
By using V-LINK-compatible video equipment, visual effects  
can be easily liked to, and made part of the expressive  
5. Touch <OFF> to cancel the V-LINK function.  
elements of a performance.  
921  
Connecting MIDI Devices  
NOTE  
By connecting an external MIDI device and exchanging  
performance data, you can control one device from the other.  
For instance, you can output sound from the other  
instrument or switch Tones on the other instrument.  
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other  
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power  
on all devices before making any connections.  
Connection Examples:  
Whats MIDI?  
fig.02-  
MIDI, short for Musical Instrument Digital Interface,was  
developed as a universal standard for the exchange of  
performance data between electronic instruments and  
computers.  
V-LINK compatible image device  
The KR105 is equipped with MIDI connectors to let it  
exchange performance data with external devices. These  
connectors can be used to connect the KR105 to an external  
USB MIDI Interface  
device for even greater versatility.  
984  
KR105  
*
A separate publication titled MIDI Implementationis also  
available. It provides complete details concerning the way  
MIDI has been implemented on this unit. If you should require  
this publication (such as when you intend to carry out byte-  
level programming), please contact the nearest Roland Service  
Center or authorized Roland distributor.  
MIDI OUT  
I Using the V-LINK function  
1. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.  
2. Press the [Option] button.  
I Connectors  
fig.09-  
3. Touch <V-LINK>.  
4. Touch <ON>.  
Switches to Image Control mode.  
You can control images using the twelve keys at the left  
end of the keyboard.  
MIDI Out Connector  
Connect this to the MIDI In connector on an external MIDI  
device using a MIDI cable (sold separately).  
When V-LINK is on, V-LINKis indicated in the Basic  
Performance data when you play the keyboard or depress a  
pedal is sent from this connector to the external MIDI  
connector.  
screen and other screens.  
MIDI In Connector  
Connect this to the MIDI Out connector on an external MIDI  
device using a MIDI cable (sold separately).  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
This receives MIDI messages that are sent from external  
MIDI devices. The KR105 receiving MIDI messages can  
output sounds, exchange tones and perform other  
operations.  
Connecting with a MIDI Sound Module  
fig.09-  
Sound Module  
MIDI  
THRU  
OUT  
IN  
*
External MIDI devices cant be used for remotely changing the  
Tones played by the KR105s keyboard.  
I Making the Connections  
KR105  
*
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other  
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power  
on all devices before making any connections.  
1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR105 and  
on the device youre about to connect.  
2. Switch off the power to the KR105 and the device  
Synchronizing with  
youre about to connect.  
Connected MIDI Devices  
3. Use a MIDI cable (sold separately) to connect the MIDI  
You can have connected MIDI devices played by the tempo  
produced by the KR105; you can also have the tempo  
produced by connected MIDI devices play the KR105. This  
setting is called the MIDI Sync.”  
Having connected MIDI devices work at the same tempo, and  
start and stop at the same timing is called synchronization.”  
connectors to each other.  
Please refer to the connection examples below.  
4. Switch on the power to the KR105 and the connected  
device.  
1. Switch to the Basic screen, or press the One Touch  
5. Adjust the volume level on the KR105 and the  
connected device.  
Program [Piano] button.  
2. Touch <Options>.  
For details on the MIDI-related settings, refer to  
3. Touch <MIDI Sync>.  
The following screen is appeared.  
p. 146p. 147.  
Connection Examples:  
Setup with a MIDI Sequencer  
fig.09-10  
Roland MT Series  
Out  
MIDI  
In  
KR105  
4. Touch <L><M> to make the setting.  
Displayed  
Auto  
Meaning  
*
When the KR105 is connected to a MIDI sequencer, set it to  
Local OFF. Refer to Disconnecting the Internal Sound  
Generator and Keyboard (Local Control)(p. 146).  
The KR105s tempo as well as the starting  
and stopping of playback and recording is  
controlled by the MIDI device connected to  
the KR105s MIDI In connector. When there  
is no MIDI device connected, then these op-  
erations can be performed by the KR105.  
Adjustment of the KR105s tempo and start-  
ing and stopping of playback and recording  
is performed by the KR105.  
Int  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Displayed  
Ext  
Meaning  
5. Select the method for using the MIDI In connector.  
The KR105s tempo as well as the starting  
and stopping of playback and recording is  
controlled by the MIDI device connected to  
the pro  
s MIDI In connector. When there is no MIDI  
device connected, then tempo changing op-  
eration can not be controlled by the pro  
Displayed  
Meaning  
Normal setting.  
Normal  
Make changes in Tone and other settings  
from the connected device.  
Select this when you have percussion pads  
connected to the KR105s MIDI In connector.  
You do not need to make any MIDI settings  
on the KR105. Select pad Tones and make  
other settings from the connected pads (for  
further details, refer to the Owners Manual  
provided with the pads).  
Playback and recording of songs is con-  
trolled by the connected MIDI device.  
Remote  
Pad  
*
Unless the above is set to either Intor Auto,the KR105s  
buttons cannot be used to adjust the KR105s tempo.  
Ordinarily, you should set this to Int.”  
Select this when you have a keyboard con-  
nected to the KR105s MIDI In connector.  
You can select tones for the connected key-  
board from the KR105. No MIDI settings  
need be made on the KR105.  
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Function screen.  
Keyboard  
Performing in Ensemble with  
MIDI Instruments (MIDI  
Ensemble)  
6. When Keyboardis selected in Step 4 above, use  
<L><M> to select the Tone.  
The connected keyboard plays using the selected Tone.  
You can connect an electronic percussion device or other  
MIDI instrument to the KR105s MIDI In connector for  
ensemble playing. Making the MIDI settings for the  
instrument connected to the MIDI In connector is easy. The  
sounds from the connected MIDI instrument are played from  
the KR105s speaker.  
1. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.  
2. Touch <Option>.  
3. Use <L> and <M> to select the third page:  
4. Touch <MIDI Ensemble>.  
A screen like the following appears.  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Making the Settings  
MIDI Settings  
You can make MIDI settings like those described below.  
1. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.  
2. Press the [Option] button.  
<MIDI Setting>  
3. Touch <MIDI Setting> or <Program Change>.  
4. Touch <L><M> to make the setting for each item.  
Touch <Exit> to return to the Functions screen.  
I Selecting the Transmit Channel  
(Tx Channel)  
MIDI organizes things into channels,which are numbered  
from 1 through 16. Simply connecting a cable is not enough  
for communication to take place. The connected devices must  
be set to use the same MIDI channels. Otherwise, no sound  
will be produced, and no sounds can be selected.  
Display  
Chooses the MIDI send channel  
(p. 146).  
Tx Channel  
Select the transmit channel (116) of the KR105.  
The channel setting is at 1when the KR105 is powered up.  
Switches Local Control on or off  
(p. 146).  
Local Control  
If the keyboard has been split into upper and lower sections,  
messages from the left-hand section are fixed at 3.”  
The KR105 receives messages on all channels from 1 through  
16.  
<Program Change>  
I Disconnecting the Internal  
Sound Generator and  
Keyboard (Local Control)  
When connecting a MIDI sequencer, set Local Control to  
OFF.The setting is at Local Control ONwhen the KR105  
is powered up.  
As illustrated, information describing what has been played  
on the keyboard is passed to the sound module over two  
different routes, (1) and (2). As a result, you hear overlapping  
or intermittent sounds. To prevent this from happening,  
route (1) must be disabled, by setting the unit to what is  
Display  
Sends Bank Select MSB messages  
(p. 147).  
Bank Select MSB  
known as Local Off.”  
fig.09-  
(1) Local On  
Sends Bank Select LSB messages  
(p. 147).  
Bank Select LSB  
Program Change  
Sequencer  
MIDI  
OUT  
MIDI  
IN  
Sound  
Generator  
Sends Program Change messages  
(Program Numbers) (p. 147).  
Memory  
MIDI  
OUT  
MIDI  
IN  
(2)  
Soft Tru On  
Each note played is sounded twice  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Local On: The keyboard and internal sound generator are  
I Sending Tone Change Messages  
(Program Change/Bank Select  
MSB/Bank Select LSB)  
connected.  
fig.09-  
Sound is emitted  
A Program Change is a message that means change to the  
Tone of the specified number.The device that receives this  
changes to the Tone of the corresponding number.  
Sound Generator  
Local On  
When you choose a Program Change message (Program  
Number), the Program Number will be transmitted to the  
MIDI device connected to the KR105. The MIDI device that  
receives the Program Number changes the tone to the  
corresponding Program Number.  
Local Off: The keyboard and internal sound generator are  
Normally, the Tone is selected from the 128 Tones available.  
Some MIDI devices, however, have more than 128 Tones.  
With such devices, the Tone is selected through a  
combination of Program Change messages and Bank Select  
messages. There are two parts of a Bank Select message: the  
MSB (Controller 0, with a value of 0127) and the LSB  
(Controller 32, with a value of 0127).  
separated. No sound will be produced by the  
keyboard when it is played.  
fig.09-  
No sound produced  
Sound Generator  
Local Off  
*
Some MIDI instruments cant handle Bank Select messages.  
Others can handle Bank Selects, but do not recognize the LSB  
part.  
¡ When connecting a unit in the Roland MT series, you dont  
need to switch off Local Control. MT units transmit Local Off  
messages when their power is switched on. First turn on the  
power to the KR105, then after a few moments, play a note on  
the KR105; when you turn on the power to the MT Series  
device, Local Off is automatically enabled for the KR105.  
Sending Recorded  
Performance Data to a MIDI  
Device (Composer MIDI Out)  
When Composer Out is active, you can send performance  
data recorded with the KR105 to a connected MIDI device or  
computer.  
When you turn on the power, this is set to OFF(data is not  
sent).  
1. Press the [Menu] button.  
2. Touch <Composer MIDI Out>.  
3. Touch <L><M> to set ON or OFF.  
4. Touch <Exit> to return to the Menu screen.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
I Making the Connections  
Connecting to Audio  
Equipment  
When you connect the KR105 to audio equipment, you can  
play the sounds from the KR105 through the speakers on the  
audio equipment or record your performances on a tape  
recorder or other recording device.  
*
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other  
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power  
on all devices before making any connections.  
Playing Sounds from the KR105 Through the  
Speakers on Audio Equipment or Recording Your  
Performances on a Recording Device  
When connecting, please use audio cables (sold separately)  
with standard phone plugs.  
fig.09-  
Input R/L  
(Line In, Aux In)  
I Connectors  
fig.09-  
KR105  
Pedal  
Output Jacks  
You can connect audio equipment using audio cables (sold  
separately) and play the sounds from the KR105 through the  
speakers on the connected equipment, or record your  
performances on a tape recorder or other recording device.  
1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR105 and  
on the device youre about to connect.  
If the input of the connected device is monaural, you must  
use the L (Mono) jack.  
2. Turn off the power to the KR105 and other connected  
equipment.  
Input Jacks  
You can connect another sound source, such as audio  
equipment or an electronic instrument, using audio cables  
(sold separately). Play the sounds from the connected device  
through the speakers on the KR105.  
3. Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the  
connection.  
4. Switch on the KR105.  
If the input of the connected device is monaural, you must  
use the L (Mono) jack.  
5. Switch on the connected device.  
6. Adjust the volume level on the KR105 and the  
*
You cannot use the KR105 to adjust the volume of the  
connected sound generating device.  
connected device.  
926a  
Recording KR105 Performances on a Recording Device  
*
When connection cables with resistors are used, the volume  
level of equipment connected to the inputs jacks may be low. If  
this happens, use connection cables that do not contain  
resistors, such as those from the Roland PCS series.  
7. Start recording with the connected device.  
8. Play the keyboard.  
9. When the performance ends, stop recording on the  
connected equipment.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Playing Audio Equipment Sounds Through the  
Connecting a Computer  
Speakers on the KR105  
fig.09-  
I Connect to the MIDI Connectors  
You can use a USB MIDI interface cable (sold separately) to  
connect the KR105 to your computer.  
Output R/L  
(Line Out)  
If the KR105 is connected to a computer in which sequencer  
software such as Rolands Visual MTis installed, a song  
youve recorded on the KR105 can be saved on your  
computer.  
KR105  
Pedal  
Connection Examples  
*
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other  
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power  
on all devices before making any connections.  
1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR105 and  
on the device youre about to connect.  
*
In order to make connections to your computer, you must  
install MIDI driversoftware on your computer. For details,  
refer to the owners manual for your MIDI interface.  
2. Turn off the power to the KR105 and other connected  
equipment.  
3. Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the  
Use a USB MIDI interface cable to connect the USB  
connector of your computer to the MIDI connectors of  
the KR105.  
connection.  
4. Turn on the connected equipment.  
fig.comp.e  
5. Turn on the KR105.  
Bottom left of the KR105  
6. Adjust the volume level on the KR105 and the  
connected device.  
After use, turn off the power using the following procedure.  
MIDI OUT  
MIDI IN  
1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR105 and  
USB Connector of your  
Computer  
on the device youre about to connect.  
2. Turn off the KR105.  
USB MIDI Interface  
Computer  
3. Turn off the connected equipment.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Connection examples  
I Connect to the USB Connector  
fig.comp.e  
You can connect you computer with a USB cable to the USB  
connector, located on the left underside of the KR105, and  
exchange MIDI data between the instrument and the  
computer. You can use the KR105 to play SMF data created  
with the computer and exchange performance data in the  
same manner as with MIDI devices connected to the MIDI  
connectors.  
Bottom left of the KR  
USB connector  
Connecting your computer to the KR105 for the first time requires  
installation of the USB Driver(on the included CD-ROM) to the  
computer.  
USB Connector of your  
Computer  
The correct driver and the installation procedure will depend on  
your system and on the other programs you are using. Be sure to  
read the Readme file on the CD-ROM before installation.  
Computer  
1. Turn off the power to the KR105 and the computer.  
2. Start up the computer.  
Windows XP/2000  
\W2kXP\Readme_E.htm  
Windows Me/98/98SE  
\W98Me\Readme_E.htm  
Mac OS X  
3. Connect the KR105 and the computer with a USB cable.  
4. Turn on the power to the KR105.  
\Driver (Mac OS X)\Readme_e.htm  
¡ Refer to the owners manual that came with your computer  
*
*
Only MIDI data can be transmitted using USB.  
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices,  
always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices  
before making any connections.  
*
*
USB cables are not included. Consult your Roland dealer if you need  
to purchase.  
Turn on the power to the KR105 before starting up MIDI applications  
on the computer. Do not turn the KR105 on or off while any MIDI  
application is running.  
*
*
If not using USB, disconnect the USB cable from the KR105.  
If during the transmission/reception of data, the computer switches to  
energy-saving mode or suspended mode, or if the KR105s power is  
switched on or off, the computer may freeze, or the KR105s operation  
may become unstable.  
*
Do not connect or disconnect the USB cable or turn off the power  
during the transmission/reception of data.  
For more on system requirements, refer to the USB  
Installation Guide.”  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendices  
Troubleshooting  
If you think theres a problem, read this first.  
Case  
Cause/Remedy  
Case  
Cause/Remedy  
No sound is heard  
The power doesnt  
in correctly? (p. 15)  
come on  
connected device turned all the way down?  
The button doesnt  
Is the panel locked? (p. 140)  
Turn the power off, then back on.  
Are headphones plugged in? (p. 17)  
Has a plug remained connected to the  
Phones jack?  
When headphones or plugs are connected,  
the keyboards speaker stops playing.  
work  
The KR105 uses a liquid-crystal screen, so  
text may not be displayed when the  
ambient temperature is below freezing.  
Nothing appears  
on screen  
No sound is heard  
These occur due to the nature of a liquid  
malfunction. They can be minimized by  
adjusting the brightness of the screen (p.  
18).  
way to the right or left?  
Has the volume been set to 0using the  
Part Balance? (p. 52)  
Vertical lines  
appear in the  
screen  
Has the footage been adjusted so that all  
frequency components arent sounded? (p.  
15 in the Quick Start)  
since it was last used. Take a look at  
Calibrating the Touch Screen (Touch  
Screen)(p. 139) to correct the positioning.  
The touch screen  
doesnt respond  
correctly  
Is the speaker cable connected and plugged  
in correctly?  
No sound from the left side is V-LINK  
switched on? (p. 143)  
When V-LINK is switched on, the twelve  
keys at the left end of the keyboard are used  
to control images, and no sounds are  
played with these keys.  
Is the pedal connected correctly?  
Make sure the pedal cord extending from  
the stand is securely connected to the pedal  
connector on the rear of the unit (p. 15).  
No sound is heard  
Depressing a  
pedal has no  
See Assigning Functions to Pedals and  
Performance Pads (Pedal Setting/User  
Functions)(p. 126).  
effect, or the pedal  
effect doesnt stop  
No sound is heard  
(when a MIDI  
instrument is  
connected)  
Are the MIDI cables connected correctly?  
(p. 144)  
Normal pedal operation is automatically  
enabled when the One Touch Program  
[Piano] button is pressed (p. 16).  
Does the MIDI channel match the  
connected instrument? (p. 146)  
Has Local Control been set to Off?  
When Local Control is set to Off, no sound  
is produced by playing the keyboard.  
Set Local Control to On (p. 146).  
No sound is heard  
when the keyboard  
is played  
Could you be using a connection cable that  
contains a resistor?  
Use a connection cable that does not  
contain a resistor.  
926b  
The volume level  
of the instrument  
connected to Input  
jacks is too low  
The maximum number of notes can play  
simultaneously is 64. Frequent use of the  
damper pedal during automatic  
accompaniment or when playing along  
with a song may result in performance data  
with too many notes, causing some notes to  
drop out.  
Do you have different external devices  
plugged into different power outlets?  
When connecting external devices, always  
draw power from the same outlet.  
Low hum coming  
from external  
device  
Not all played  
notes are sounded  
Mic volume  
changes  
Adjusting the panels [Volume] knob may  
cause the mic volume to change.  
The sound is strange  
Is the KR105 in Layer play? (p. 25)  
Sounds are heard  
twice (doubled)  
when the keyboard  
is played  
When the KR105 is connected to an external  
sequencer, set it to the Local OFF mode  
(p. 146). Alternatively, the sequencer could  
be set so its Soft Thru feature is OFF.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendices  
Case  
Cause/Remedy  
Case  
Cause/Remedy  
Have you set transpose? (p. 73)  
When listening through headphones:  
Some of the more flamboyant and  
The tuning or pitch  
of the keyboard or  
song is off  
Are the settings for the Temperament”  
effervescent piano tones feature an ample  
high-end component, which may make the  
sound appear to have metallic reverberation  
added. Since this reverberation becomes  
particularly audible when supplemented by  
heavy reverb, you may be able to diminish  
the problem by reducing the amount of  
reverb applied to the sound.  
When listening through speakers:  
Here, a different cause (such as resonance  
produced by the KR105) would be suspect.  
Consult your Roland dealer or nearest  
Roland Service Center.  
and Stretch Tuningcorrect? (p. 133)  
Is the setting for the Master Tunecorrect?  
(p. 136)  
A High-pitched  
Its not possible to apply more than one  
effect at the same time, so when a  
performance has been recorded on multiple  
tracks or when playing along with a song as  
its played back, the desired effect may not  
be applied.  
whine is produced  
Effects cannot be  
applied to Tones  
Have the Chord Tone and Bass Tone been  
changed? (p. 128)  
A note doesnt stop  
Some Chord Tone and Bass Tone notes may  
be sounded continuously.  
playing  
When listening through speakers:  
Playing at loud volumes may cause  
instruments near the KR105 to resonate.  
Resonation can also occur with fluorescent  
light tubes, glass doors, and other objects.  
In particular, this problem occurs more  
easily when the bass component is  
increased, and when the sound is played at  
higher volumes. Use the following  
measures to suppress such resonance.  
Place speakers so they are 1015 cm from  
walls and other surfaces.  
Reduce the volume.  
Move the speakers away from any  
resonating objects.  
When listening through headphones:  
Here, a different cause (such as resonance  
produced by the KR105) would be suspect.  
Consult your Roland dealer or nearest  
Roland Service Center.  
During automatic accompaniment,  
changing the Music Style automatically  
changes the Tones and tempo of the upper  
and Tone, check out Changing Music  
Styles Without Changing the Tone or  
Tempo (One Touch Setting)(p. 125).  
The bass range  
sounds odd, or  
there is a vibrating  
resonance  
The Tone has  
changed  
When a performance made along with a  
Music Files tune has been recorded,  
recording the performance to button [1/  
Whole] may make the Tones for buttons [3/  
Lower] and [4/Upper] change as well.  
Since the KR105s piano sounds faithfully  
reproduce the sense of spaciousness and  
reverberation of an actual acoustic pianos  
sound, a certain amount of reverberation is  
still perceptible, even with the reverb effect  
deactivated.  
Reverberation still  
audible even with  
Reverb turned off  
The automatic accompaniment doesnt play  
correctly  
Touch <Exit> several times to return to the  
Basic screen (p. 19), and then select a tone or  
Music Style.  
Cant select a tone  
On an acoustic piano, notes in the upper  
one and a half octaves of the keyboard  
continue to sound until they decay  
naturally, regardless of the damper pedal.  
There is a difference in the timbre as well.  
Roland pianos faithfully simulate such  
characteristics of the acoustic piano. The  
range that is unaffected by the damper  
pedal will change depending on the Key  
Transpose setting.  
or Music Style  
In the upper range,  
the sound changes  
abruptly beyond a  
certain key  
Has the Balance knob been moved all the  
way to the right? (p. 52)  
Have you pressed the One Touch Program  
[Arranger] button?  
If the One Touch Program [Arranger]  
button has not been pressed, only the  
Automatic  
accompaniment is  
not heard  
Is the 16-track Sequencer screen displayed?  
(p. 99)  
Has Chord Intelligence been set to manual?  
(p. 128)  
Chord Intelligence  
cant be used  
Is the setting for Piano Style Arranger”  
active? (p. 51)  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Case  
Cause/Remedy  
Case  
Cause/Remedy  
In certain cases, such as when playing  
Music Styles on floppy disks, the  
accompaniment may lag when excessive  
amounts of performance data are used.  
With some music files, the lyrics cannot be  
displayed correctly.  
Accompaniment  
tempo becomes  
unstable  
If you press a button while the lyrics are  
being shown in the display, the lyrics will  
disappear. To recall them, touch <lyrics> in  
the Piano or Basic screen, or press the  
Lyrics are not  
indicated properly  
in the display  
Song doesnt play back correctly  
[
(Play/Stop)] button.  
Does the screen indicate message, like OK  
to delete song?(p. 75)  
In the notation screen, some lyrics or notes  
could extend beyond the edges of the  
screen, and not be displayed.  
The internal songs cannot be played back  
while recorded performance data remains  
in the KR105s memory. Try playing back  
the song after deleting the performance  
data.  
Song doesnt play  
back  
performance data, notes will not be  
displayed in the notation. Change the part  
that is displayed (p. 64).  
Is the light for the Track button  
extinguished? (p. 69)  
If the button light is out, the music on that  
track is not heard. Press the track button so  
the light is illuminated.  
complex musical works that demand  
accurate notation. Refer to Notes  
Notation is not  
indicated properly  
in the display  
Only the sound of a  
particular  
instrument in a  
song does not play  
Regarding the Score Display(p. 62).  
Have song settings been changed for each  
Part on the 16-Track sequencer screen (p.  
100)?  
In the notation screen, some lyrics or notes  
could extend beyond the edges of the  
screen, and not be displayed.  
Some music files may contain settings that  
stop play at a point partway through the  
Pressing the [  
(Reset)] button  
doesnt return to  
the beginning of  
the song  
In certain cases, such as when playing  
songs on floppy disk, the song may lag  
when excessive amounts of performance  
data are used.  
Song becomes  
unstable  
song. Press the [  
(Reset)] button several  
times more to return to the beginning of the  
tune.  
Unable to play  
back internal  
songs  
Has a Marker placed in the song? (p. 70)  
Have you pressed the remote controls  
[MUTE] button, muting the sound?  
The fast-forward and reverse buttons are  
ignored while music files is being read in.  
Wait until processing finishes.  
The [  
and [  
(Fwd)]  
(Bwd)]  
If you attempt to play back performance  
data that contains more data than the entire  
capacity of the KR105s memory, you may  
find that operations other than playback  
(such as rewind or fast forward) become  
unavailable.  
Cant record  
Has one of the track buttons for recording  
buttons dont work  
Has the setting for Punch-in Recording”  
been made?  
Select the replace recording method (p.  
103).  
There are two types of SMF music files:  
format 0 and format 1. If the song uses SMF  
format 1 data, there will be a slight delay  
until playback starts. Refer to the booklet  
that came with the music files youre using  
to determine the format type.  
There is a slight  
delay before  
playback of a song  
starts  
Cant record  
It is not possible to record while the  
notation is being generated. Once the unit  
has finished generating the notation (i.e.,  
when the measure number in the screen is  
no longer highlighted), try the operation  
once again.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Case  
Cause/Remedy  
If you select an internal song in which the  
tempo changes during the song, and then  
record, the tempo will change in the same  
way for the performances that are recorded  
on the other tracks. The tempo of the  
metronome will also change in the same  
way.  
Tempo of recorded  
song or  
metronome is off  
If you record additional material without  
erasing the previously recorded song, the  
song will be recorded at the first-recorded  
tempo. Please erase the previously  
recorded song before you re-record (p. 82).  
Any performance that has been recorded is  
deleted when the power to the KR105 is  
turned off or a song is selected. A  
performance cannot be restored once its  
been deleted.  
The recorded  
performance has  
disappeared  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Messages  
Indication  
Meaning  
Error 00:  
To protect the copyright, this music file cannot be saved as an SMF.  
Also, the music file can not be saved. If you want to save it, please save on the same  
floppy disk.  
Due to copyright protection, the file cannot be saved as an  
SMF. Also, the file cannot be saved on another disk.  
Error 01:  
memory.  
This file cannot be saved. The file is read-only.  
Error 02:  
The protect tab on the floppy disk is set to the Protect position. the Write position. Repeat the procedure.  
Error 03:  
This floppy disk cannot store the format or save any data.  
Insert a different disk and repeat the procedure.  
This is a master disk. It cannot be formatted, nor can data be  
stored on it.  
Error 04:  
The data cannot be saved onto this floppy disk because the format is different. Use  
the floppy disk in the same format.  
File cannot be saved on this disk. SMFs and i-format files  
cannot both be stored on the same disk.  
Error 05:  
A new song cannot be written on this song. Select a different song number or use  
a different floppy disk, and repeat the procedure.  
Cannot overwrite destination. Select different destination, or  
save on another floppy disk.  
Error 10:  
No floppy disk is connected to the disk drive. Insert the disk correctly, and repeat  
the procedure.  
No floppy disk. Insert the disk correctly.  
Error 11:  
There is not sufficient space left on the floppy disk or User memory for the data to  
be saved. Insert a different floppy disk or delete files on user memory, and repeat  
the procedure.  
There is insufficient space available on the disk, or in  
user memory.  
The floppy disk inserted into the disk drive can’t be read. Be sure you’re using Ro-  
land SMF Music Files or other music files compatible with Roland digital pianos.  
Also, if you want to save your work on floppy disk, you need to format the floppy  
disk first (p. 85).  
Error 12:  
This disk cannot be recognized. Disk has not been formatted,  
or is of an incompatible format.  
Error 13:  
The floppy disk was removed from the disk drive while reading or writing was in  
progress. Insert the floppy disk and repeat the procedure.  
Disk removed from drive while being accessed.  
Never eject a disk while reading/writing is in progress.  
Error 14:  
This floppy disk or user memory is damaged and cannot be used. Insert a different  
disk and repeat the procedure or format the user memory (p. 139).  
Part of the data on the disk or in the user memory was found  
to be corrupted. Insert different disk, or format user memory.  
Error 15:  
This song or music style cannot be read. Please use a Roland SMF Music Files or  
Roland Digital Piano compatible music files (p. 168). Also, you can only use User  
Programs that have been saved with the KR105 (p. 94).  
This file cannot be read. The file uses an incompatible file  
format.  
The KR105 cannot read the floppy disk or user memory quickly enough. Press the  
Error 16:  
The performance is canceled. First, stop playback. Then start  
it again from the beginning.  
[
(Play/Stop)] button, then press the [  
(Reset)] button and [  
(Play/  
Stop)] button to play the song.  
The selected image data cannot be displayed. If it cannot be made to appear either  
on the KR105’s display or the external display, you will need to prepare image  
data that can be used with the KR105 (p. 137).  
Error 17:  
This file cannot be displayed on the selected display screen.  
The internal memory capacity of the KR105 is full. Save the song data on a floppy  
disk (p. 87) and delete the song or the User style data stored on the KR105  
memory.  
Error 30:  
The instrument's internal memory is full.  
Error 40:  
The KR105 cannot deal with the excessive MIDI data sent from the external MIDI  
device. Reduce the amount of MIDI data sent to the KR105.  
Processing of the MIDI data was not performed in time.  
Error 41:  
A MIDI cable or computer cable has been disconnected. Connect it properly and  
securely.  
A MIDI cable or computer cable has been disconnected.  
Connect it properly.  
Error 42:  
An excessive amount of performance data has been sent to KR105 in one time and  
therefore could not be recorded. Change the tempo more slowly to record the per-  
formance again.  
The data could not be processed quickly enough. Try  
recording at a slower tempo.  
Error 43:  
The Computer switch is set to a wrong position or the computer is set wrongly.  
Switch off the KR105 then set the Computer switch to the correct position and set  
the computer correctly. After that, switch on the KR105 again.  
Either this instrument's Computer Switch is set inappropriately,  
or your computer is not set properly. Set them correctly, then  
switch the instrument on again.  
Error 51:  
There may be a problem with the system. Repeat the procedure from the begin-  
There is something wrong with the system. Contact a Roland ning. If it is not solved after you have tried several times, contact the Roland ser-  
Service Center.  
vice center.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Tone List  
Mute PickBs.  
Mr.Smooth  
Open Hard  
Dazed Guitar  
Acid Guitar  
Ukulele  
Synth Brass3  
Trombone2  
Piccolo  
Heaven II  
[Piano]  
[Organ]  
Jazz Organ  
JP8 Sqr Pad  
Sweep Pad 2  
Big Panner  
Ai-yai-a  
Echo Pan 2  
Falling Down  
Poly King  
Warm Pad  
RandomEnding  
Piano 1  
Piano 1w  
Piano 1d  
Piano 2  
Piano 2w  
Piano 3  
Piano 3w  
Grand Piano1  
PianoStrings  
Piano Choir  
Pro Stage  
Harpsichord  
Vintage EP  
Vibraphone  
Harpsi.Doubl  
Marimba  
Steel Drums  
Honky-tonk 2  
Stage E.Piano  
Ballad Piano  
Tremolo EP  
Jazzy Vib+Gt  
Wurly  
Full Organ 1  
Lower Organ  
Theater Org.  
Nason flt 8’  
Bandneon  
Organ Flute  
Jazz Organ2  
Full Organ 2  
Full Organ 3  
Lower Organ2  
Church Organ  
Rock Organ1  
Harmonica  
Pop Organ  
Pan Flute  
GS Pan Flute  
Blow Pipe  
Bottle Blow  
Bassoon  
Koto  
Shamisen  
Recorder  
French Horn  
Synth Brass1  
Synth Brass2  
Oct SynBrass  
Shakuhachi  
Brass 1  
[Strings]  
Strings  
Slow Strings  
Choir Str  
Harp Strings  
Trem. Str  
Violin  
Brass 2  
Ocarina  
Accordion  
GS Honkytonk  
Honky-tonk 2  
GS E.Piano1  
GS E.Piano2  
60's E.Piano  
E.Piano 1v  
E.Piano 2v  
Detuned EP 1  
Detuned EP 2  
GS Harpsi  
Coupled Hps.  
Harpsi.w  
Cello  
Rock Piano  
Clav.  
Trem.Flute  
Jazz Organ3  
Jazz Organ4  
Full Organ 4  
Rotary Org.S  
Rotary Org.F  
Rock Organ2  
Pipe Org. Bs  
Organ Bass  
Metalic Org.  
VS Organ  
Warm Strings  
DecayStrings  
Orchestra  
Oct Strings  
St. Harp  
Velo Strings  
Legato Str  
PizzicatoStr  
SlowStrings2  
Bell Strings  
OrchestraHit  
Warm JP Str  
Slow Violin  
Contrabass  
Timpani  
[Voice]  
Jazz Scat  
Honky-Tonk  
Bright Piano  
Harpsi.Singl  
UprightPiano  
Grand Piano2  
Bell Piano  
Piano Oohs  
E. Grand  
MIDI Piano1  
E.Piano 1  
FM+SA EP  
St.FM EP  
Hard FM EP  
Soft Marimba  
MIDI EP1  
MIDI EP 2  
Hard EP  
Dreamy Choir  
Boys Choir  
Holy Voices  
HollowReleas  
Rich Choir  
Dat Accent  
Bop Accent  
Thum Voice  
Pop Voice  
Org Bells  
Organ 1  
Organ 2  
Digi Church  
Harpsi.o  
Soft Clav.  
Celesta  
Humming  
Glockenspiel  
Music Box  
Vibraphone  
Vibe.w  
GS Marimba  
Marimba  
Xylophone  
Tubular-bell  
Church Bell  
Carillon  
Doos Voice  
Choir Oohs  
Choir Aahs  
Warm SqrPad  
New Age Pad  
LM PureLead  
LM Square  
Natural Lead  
2600 SubOsc  
SquareWave2  
Fantasia  
Syn.Strings1  
Syn.Strings2  
Strings 2  
OB Strings  
Euro Hit  
[Guitar / Bass]  
Steel Guitar  
Nylon Guitar  
Jazz Guitar  
Nylon+Steel  
12str Guitar  
Nylon Gt.o  
Hawaiian Gt.  
Banjo  
JC E.Guitar  
Muted Gt.  
Acoustic Bs.  
A.Bass+Cymbl  
DistortionGt  
Steel Vox  
Rock Rhythm  
Rock Rhythm2  
Overdrive Gt  
Power Guitar  
Power Gt.2  
Muted Dis.Gt  
Fingered Bs.  
Picked Bs.  
Fretless Bs.  
Slap Bass  
Muted Gt.2  
Mellow Gt.  
5th Dist.  
Feedback Gt2  
Synth Bass 1  
Synth Bass 2  
SynthBass101  
Jungle Bass  
Modular Bass  
WireStr Bass  
ResoSH Bass  
SH101 Bass  
Harpsi.o  
Coupled Hps.  
Vibra Bells  
Celesta  
Glockenspiel  
Soft E.Piano  
60's E.Piano  
E.Piano 2  
6th Hit  
Bass Hit  
Santur  
Organ 1  
Organ 2  
[Sax / Brass]  
EX Tenor Sax  
Soprano Sax  
Flute  
Crystal  
Harpvox  
CC Solo  
E.Piano 3  
Pop Organ  
Detuned Or.1  
Detuned Or.2  
Church Org.1  
Church Org.2  
Church Org.3  
Full Organ 4  
Jazz Organ  
Rock Organ 2  
Reed Organ  
Accordion Fr  
Accordion It  
GS Harmonica  
Bandoneon  
GS Nylon Gt.  
Nylon Guitar  
Nylon Gt.o  
Ukulele  
Xylophone  
Music Box  
Balafon  
Brightness  
Syn.Square  
JP8 Square  
FM Lead  
FM Lead 2  
Mg Lead  
Dual Sqr&Saw  
P5 Saw Lead  
Rhythmic Saw  
Waspy Synth  
JP8 Pulse  
Cheese Saw  
SynVox  
Clear Bells  
Soft Crystal  
Digi Bells  
Nylon Harp  
Nylon+EP  
Fantasia 2  
Trumpet  
MutedTrumpet  
AltoSax + Tp  
Oboe  
Clarinet  
TromboneSoft  
Soft Brass  
Detuned EP 1  
Detuned EP 2  
Hard E.Piano  
Hard Clav.  
Soft Clav.  
Reso Clav.  
Phase Clav.  
Pop Vibe.  
Pop Celesta  
Tubular-bell  
Santur  
Kalimba  
Air Grand  
Piano 1  
Baritone Sax  
Tuba  
Romantic Tp  
Power Brass  
St. Brass ff  
English Horn  
BrassSection  
Blow Sax  
Brite Brass  
Brass ff  
EX Trumpet  
Grow Sax  
Alto Sax  
Piano 2  
Piano 3  
Steel-str.Gt  
12-str.Gt  
Mandolin  
Jazz Guitar  
Hawaiian  
Clean Gt.  
Soft Pad  
P5 Poly  
Reso Saw  
RAVE Vox  
Fat & Perky  
Tenor Sax  
GS Bari Sax  
Flugel Horn  
Fr.Horn Solo  
Chorus Gt.  
Muted Gt.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Funk Gt.  
Square  
Door  
Pizzicato*  
Agogo*  
Funk Gt.2  
Overdrive Gt  
DistortionGt  
Feedback Gt.  
Gt.Harmonics  
Gt.Feedback  
GS Ac.Bass  
GS Fing.Bass  
Picked Bs  
Sine Wave  
Saw Wave  
Saw  
Doctor Solo  
Syn.Calliope  
Chiffer Lead  
Charang  
Solo Vox  
5th Saw Wave  
Bass & Lead  
Fantasia  
Warm Pad  
Polysynth  
Space Voice  
Bowed Glass  
Metal Pad  
Halo Pad  
Sweep Pad  
Ice Rain  
Soundtrack  
Crystal  
Syn Mallet  
Atmosphere  
Brightness  
Goblin  
Echo Drops  
Echo Bell  
Echo Pan  
Star Theme  
Sitar  
Scratch  
Harp*  
Timpani*  
Strings*  
Steel Drums*  
Woodblock*  
Taiko*  
Melo.Tom 1*  
Synth Drum*  
ReverseCym.*  
Fret Noise*  
BreathNoise*  
Seashore*  
Windchime  
Helicopter  
Car-Engine  
Car-Stop  
Car-Pass  
Car-Crash  
Siren  
Train  
Jetplane  
Starship  
Burst Noise  
Applause  
Laughing  
Screaming  
Punch  
Heart Beat  
Footsteps  
Gun Shot  
Machine Gun  
Lasergun  
SlowStrings*  
Syn.Str 1*  
Syn.Str 2*  
Choir Aahs*  
Pop Voice*  
SynVox*  
Orche.Hit*  
Trumpet*  
Trombone*  
Tuba*  
Fretless Bs.  
Slap Bass  
Bird*  
Telephone 1*  
Helicopter*  
Applause*  
Gun Shot*  
Slap Bass 2  
SynthBass101  
Synth Bass 1  
Synth Bass 2  
Synth Bass 3  
Synth Bass 4  
Rubber Bass  
Violin  
Slow Violin  
Viola  
Cello  
Contrabass  
Trem. Str  
PizzicatoStr  
GS Harp  
M.Trumpet*  
FrenchHorns*  
Brass 1*  
*
Tone with a “*”  
SynthBrass1*  
SynthBrass2*  
A.Brass 1*  
Soprano Sax*  
Alto Sax*  
Tenor Sax*  
BaritoneSax*  
Oboe*  
EnglishHorn*  
Bassoon*  
Clarinet*  
Piccolo*  
Flute*  
symbol appended to  
their name may not  
play back satisfactorily  
on other GS sound  
generating devices.  
Explosion  
Piano 1*  
Piano 2*  
Piano 3*  
Honky-tonk*  
E.Piano 1*  
E.Piano 2*  
Harpsichord*  
Clav.*  
Timpani  
GS Strings  
Orchestra  
GS Sl.Str  
Recorder*  
Pan Flute*  
Bottle Blow*  
Shakuhachi*  
Whistle*  
Syn.Strings1  
Syn.Strings2  
Syn.Strings3  
Choir Aahs  
Choir  
Sitar 2  
Banjo  
Shamisen  
Koto  
Taisho Koto  
Kalimba  
Bagpipe  
Fiddle  
Shanai  
Tinkle Bell  
Agogo  
Celesta*  
Glocken*  
Music Box*  
Vibraphone  
Marimba*  
Xylophone*  
Tubularbell*  
Santur*  
Ocarina*  
Pop Voice  
SynVox  
Square Wave*  
Saw Wave*  
Doctor Solo*  
SynCalliope*  
ChifferLead*  
Charang*  
Solo Vox*  
5th SawWave*  
Bass & Lead*  
Fantasia*  
Warm Pad*  
Polysynth*  
Space Voice*  
Bowed Glass*  
Metal Pad*  
Halo Pad*  
Sweep Pad*  
Ice Rain*  
Soundtrack*  
Crystal*  
Syn Mallet*  
Atmosphere*  
Brightness*  
Goblin*  
Echo Drops*  
Star Theme*  
Sitar*  
OrchestraHit  
GS Trumpet  
Trombone  
Trombone 2  
Tuba  
MutedTrumpet  
French Horn  
Fr.Horn 2  
Organ 1*  
Organ 2*  
Pop Organ 1*  
Rock Organ2*  
ChurchOrg.1*  
Reed Organ*  
AccordionFr*  
Harmonica*  
Bandoneon*  
Nylon-strGt*  
Steel-strGt*  
Jazz Guitar*  
Clean Gt.*  
Muted Gt.*  
Funk Gt.*  
OverdriveGt*  
Dist.Guitar*  
Gt.Harmo*  
Acoustic Bs*  
Fingered Bs*  
Picked Bs.*  
Fretless Bs*  
Slap Bass 1*  
Slap Bass 2*  
SynthBass 1*  
SynthBass 2*  
Rubber Bass*  
Violin*  
Steel Drums  
Woodblock  
Castanets  
Taiko  
Brass 1  
Brass 2  
Concert BD  
Melo. Tom 1  
Melo. Tom 2  
Synth Drum  
808 Tom  
Elec Perc.  
Reverse Cym.  
Gt.FretNoise  
Gt.Cut Noise  
String Slap  
Breath Noise  
Fl.Key Click  
Seashore  
Rain  
Thunder  
Wind  
Stream  
Bubble  
Bird  
Dog  
Horse-Gallop  
Bird 2  
Synth Brass1  
Synth Brass2  
Synth Brass3  
Synth Brass4  
AnalogBrass1  
AnalogBrass2  
GS Sop.Sax  
Alto Sax  
Tenor Sax  
GS Bari Sax  
GS Oboe  
English Horn  
Bassoon  
Clarinet  
Piccolo  
GS Flute  
Recorder  
GS Pan Flute  
Bottle Blow  
Shakuhachi  
Whistle  
Ocarina  
Square Wave  
Banjo*  
Shamisen*  
Koto*  
Kalimba*  
Bagpipe*  
Fiddle*  
Shanai*  
Tinkle Bell*  
Viola*  
Cello*  
Contrabass*  
Tremolo Str*  
Telephone 1  
Telephone 2  
DoorCreaking  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drum Set List  
*
*
-----: No sound.  
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.  
POP Set  
ROCK Set  
JAZZ BRUSH Set  
21  
23  
24  
26  
28  
29  
31  
33  
35  
36  
38  
40  
41  
43  
45  
47  
R&B Snare  
R&B Snare  
R&B Snare  
22  
Rock Snare  
Rock Snare  
Pop Snare m  
Pop Snare Ghost  
Pop Snare m  
Finger Snap  
707 Claps  
Hand Clap  
Hand Clap2  
Hand Clap  
Pop Pedal HH  
Gospel Hand Clap  
Snare Roll  
Pop Kick  
Pop Kick  
Pop Side Stick  
Pop Sanre s  
Pop Snare Ghost  
Pop Snare s  
Pop Low Tom f  
Pop CHH 1  
Pop Low Tom  
Pop CHH 2  
Pop Mid Tom f  
Pop OHH  
Pop Snare m  
Pop Snare m  
Pop Snare m  
Pop Snare Ghost  
Pop Snare m  
Finger Snap  
707 Claps  
Hand Clap  
Hand Clap2  
Hand Clap  
Pop Pedal HH  
Gospel Hand Clap  
Snare Roll  
Rock Kick  
Rock Kick  
Rock Side Stick  
Rock Sanre s  
Rock Snare Ghost  
Rock Snare s  
Rock Low Tom f  
Rock CHH 1  
Rock Low Tom  
Rock CHH 2  
Rock Mid Tom f  
Rock OHH  
Rock Mid Tom  
Rock High Tom f  
Rock Crash Cymbal  
Rock High Tom  
Rock Ride Cymbal 1  
Pop Chinees Cymbal  
Pop Ride Bell  
Tambourine 2  
Splash Cymbal  
Cha Cha Cowbell  
Chinees Cymbal  
Vibra-slap 2  
Pop Ride Cymbal 3  
High Bongo 2  
Low Bongo 2  
Mute Conga  
High Conga 2  
Low Conga 2  
High Timbale 2  
Low Timbale 2  
High Agogo  
Pop Snare m  
Pop Snare m  
Pop Snare m  
Pop Snare Ghost  
Pop Snare m  
Finger Snap  
707 Claps  
Hand Clap  
Hand Clap2  
Hand Clap  
Pop Pedal HH  
Gospel Hand Clap  
Snare Roll  
Pop Kick  
Pop Kick  
Jazz Snare Swing  
Jazz Sanre  
Pop Snare Swing  
Jazz Sanre  
Jazz Low Tom f  
Pop CHH 1  
Jazz Low Tom  
Pop CHH 2  
Jazz Mid Tom f  
Pop OHH  
Jazz Mid Tom  
Jazz High Tom f  
Jazz Crash Cymbal 1  
Jazz High Tom  
Jazz Ride Cymbal 1  
Jazz Chinees Cymbal  
Jazz Ride Cymbal 2  
Tambourine 2  
Splash Cymbal  
Cha Cha Cowbell  
Jazz Crash Cymbal 2  
Vibra-slap 2  
Pop Ride Cymbal 2  
High Bongo 2  
Low Bongo 2  
Mute Conga  
High Conga 2  
25  
27  
[EXC7]  
[EXC7]  
[EXC7]  
[EXC7]  
[EXC7]  
[EXC7]  
30  
32  
34  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
C2  
37  
39  
42  
44  
46  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
Pop Mid Tom  
Pop High Tom f  
C3 48  
50  
49  
51  
Pop Crash Cymbal 1  
Pop High Tom  
Pop Ride Cymbal 1  
Pop Chinees Cymbal  
Pop Ride Bell  
Tambourine 2  
Splash Cymbal  
Cha Cha Cowbell  
Pop Crash Cymbal 2  
Vibra-slap 2  
Pop Ride Cymbal 2  
High Bongo 2  
Low Bongo 2  
Mute Conga  
High Conga 2  
Low Conga 2  
52  
53  
54  
56  
58  
55  
57  
59  
C4 60  
62  
61  
63  
64  
Low Conga 2  
High Timbale 2  
Low Timbale 2  
High Agogo  
Low Agogo  
Shaker 3  
High Timbale 2  
Low Timbale 2  
High Agogo  
Low Agogo  
Shaker 3  
65  
66  
68  
70  
67  
Low Agogo  
Shaker 3  
Shaker 4  
Short Hi Whistle  
69  
Shaker 4  
Short Hi Whistle  
Shaker 4  
Short Hi Whistle  
71  
[EXC2]  
[EXC2]  
[EXC2]  
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]  
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]  
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]  
C5 72  
74  
73  
75  
Short Guiro  
Long Guiro  
Claves  
[EXC3]  
[EXC3]  
Short Guiro  
Long Guiro  
Claves  
[EXC3]  
[EXC3]  
Short Guiro  
Long Guiro  
Claves  
[EXC3]  
[EXC3]  
76  
High Wood Block  
Low Wood Block  
Mute Cuica  
Open Cuica  
Mute Triangle  
Open Triangle  
Shaker  
High Wood Block  
Low Wood Block  
Mute Cuica  
Open Cuica  
Mute Triangle  
Open Triangle  
Shaker  
High Wood Block  
Low Wood Block  
Mute Cuica  
Open Cuica  
Mute Triangle  
Open Triangle  
Shaker  
77  
78  
80  
82  
[EXC4]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC5]  
79  
81  
83  
Jingle Bell  
Bell Tree  
Castanets  
Jingle Bell  
Bell Tree  
Castanets  
Jingle Bell  
Bell Tree  
Castanets  
C6 84  
86  
85  
87  
Mute Surdo  
Open Surdo  
Cana  
[EXC6]  
[EXC6]  
Mute Surdo  
Open Surdo  
Cana  
[EXC6]  
[EXC6]  
Mute Surdo  
Open Surdo  
Cana  
[EXC6]  
[EXC6]  
88  
Falamenco Hi-Timbale  
Falamenco Lo-Timbale  
Falamenco Tmbl Flam  
Shekere 1  
Falamenco Hi-Timbale  
Falamenco Lo-Timbale  
Falamenco Tmbl Flam  
Shekere 1  
Falamenco Hi-Timbale  
Falamenco Lo-Timbale  
Falamenco Tmbl Flam  
Shekere 1  
89  
90  
92  
94  
91  
93  
Shekere 2  
Shekere 2  
Shekere 2  
Low Bongo Mute  
High Bongo Mute  
-----  
-----  
-----  
Low Bongo Mute  
High Bongo Mute  
-----  
-----  
-----  
Low Bongo Mute  
High Bongo Mute  
-----  
-----  
-----  
95  
96  
98  
C7  
97  
99  
-----  
-----  
-----  
100  
101  
Falamenco HC  
Falamenco HC  
Bongo Cowbell  
-----  
Bongo Cowbell  
-----  
Falamenco HC  
Falamenco HC  
Bongo Cowbell  
-----  
Bongo Cowbell  
-----  
Falamenco HC  
Falamenco HC  
Bongo Cowbell  
-----  
Bongo Cowbell  
-----  
102  
104  
103  
105  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
*
*
-----: No sound.  
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.  
STANDARD Set  
ROOM Set  
POWER Set  
ELECTORONIC Set  
21  
23  
24  
26  
28  
29  
31  
33  
35  
36  
38  
40  
41  
43  
45  
47  
-----  
-----  
-----  
Bar Chime  
Snare Roll  
Finger Snap  
High Q  
-----  
-----  
-----  
Bar Chime  
Snare Roll  
Finger Snap  
High Q  
-----  
-----  
-----  
Bar Chime  
Snare Roll  
Finger Snap  
High Q  
-----  
-----  
-----  
Bar Chime  
Snare Roll  
Finger Snap  
High Q  
22  
25  
27  
Slap  
Slap  
Slap  
Slap  
Scratch Push  
Scratch Pull  
Sticks  
Square Click  
Metronome Click  
Metronome Bell  
Std Kick 2’  
Kick 1  
Side Stick  
Std Snr 1  
Hand Clap  
Std Snr 2  
Low Tom 2  
Closed Hi-hat 1’  
Low Tom 1  
Pedal Hi-hat 1’  
Mid Tom 2  
Open Hi-hat 1’  
Mid Tom 1  
High Tom 2  
Crash Cymbal 1  
High Tom 1  
Ride Cymbal 1  
Chinese Cymbal  
Ride Bell  
[EXC7]  
[EXC7]  
Scratch Push  
Scratch Pull  
Sticks  
Square Click  
Metronome Click  
Metronome Bell  
Kick1  
Room Kick  
Side Stick  
Room Snr 1  
Hand Clap  
Std Snr 1  
Room Low Tom 2’  
Closed Hi-hat 1’  
Room Low Tom 1’  
Pedal Hi-hat 1’  
Room Mid Tom 2’  
Open Hi-hat 1’  
Room Mid Tom 1’  
Room Hi Tom 2’  
Crash Cymbal 1  
Room Hi Tom 1’  
Ride Cymbal 1  
Chinese Cymbal  
Ride Bell  
[EXC7]  
[EXC7]  
Scratch Push  
Scratch Pull  
Sticks  
Square Click  
Metronome Click  
Metronome Bell  
Std Kick 2  
MONDO Kick  
Side Stick  
Gated SD  
[EXC7]  
[EXC7]  
Scratch Push  
Scratch Pull  
Sticks  
Square Click  
Metronome Click  
Metronome Bell  
Std Kick 2  
Elec BD  
Side Stick  
Elec SD  
Hand Clap  
[EXC7]  
[EXC7]  
30  
32  
34  
C2  
37  
39  
Hand Clap  
Snare Drum 2  
Room Low Tom 2  
Closed Hi-hat 1  
Room Low Tom 1  
Pedal Hi-hat 1  
Room Mid Tom 2  
Open Hi-hat 1  
Room Mid Tom 1  
Room Hi Tom 2  
Crash Cymbal 1  
Room Hi Tom 1  
Ride Cymbal 1  
Chinese Cymbal  
Ride Bell  
Gated SD  
Elec Low Tom 2  
Closed Hi-hat 1  
Elec Low Tom 1  
Pedal Hi-hat 1  
Elec Mid Tom 2  
Open Hi-hat 1  
Elec Mid Tom 1  
Elec Hi Tom 2  
Crash Cymbal 1  
Elec Hi Tom 1  
Ride Cymbal 1  
Reverse Cymbal  
Ride Bell  
42  
44  
46  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
C3 48  
50  
49  
51  
52  
53  
54  
56  
58  
Tambourine  
Splash Cymbal  
Cowbell  
Crash Cymbal 2  
Vibra-slap  
Tambourine  
Splash Cymbal  
Cowbell  
Crash Cymbal 2  
Vibra-slap  
Tambourine  
Splash Cymbal  
Cowbell  
Crash Cymbal 2  
Vibra-slap  
Tambourine  
Splash Cymbal  
Cowbell  
Crash Cymbal 2  
Vibra-slap  
55  
57  
59  
Ride Cymbal 2  
High Bongo  
Low Bongo  
Mute High Conga  
Open High Conga  
Low Conga  
High Timbale  
Low Timbale  
High Agogo  
Low Agogo  
Cabasa  
Ride Cymbal 2  
High Bongo  
Low Bongo  
Mute High Conga  
Open High Conga  
Low Conga  
High Timbale  
Low Timbale  
High Agogo  
Low Agogo  
Cabasa  
Ride Cymbal 2  
High Bongo  
Low Bongo  
Mute High Conga  
Open High Conga  
Low Conga  
High Timbale  
Low Timbale  
High Agogo  
Low Agogo  
Cabasa  
Ride Cymbal 2  
High Bongo  
Low Bongo  
Mute High Conga  
Open High Conga  
Low Conga  
High Timbale  
Low Timbale  
High Agogo  
Low Agogo  
Cabasa  
C4 60  
62  
61  
63  
64  
65  
66  
68  
70  
67  
69  
Maracas  
Short Hi Whistle  
Maracas  
Short Hi Whistle  
Maracas  
Short Hi Whistle  
Maracas  
Short Hi Whistle  
71  
[EXC2]  
[EXC2]  
[EXC2]  
[EXC2]  
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]  
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]  
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]  
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]  
C5 72  
74  
73  
75  
Short Guiro  
Long Guiro  
Claves  
[EXC3]  
[EXC3]  
Short Guiro  
Long Guiro  
Claves  
[EXC3]  
[EXC3]  
Short Guiro  
Long Guiro  
Claves  
[EXC3]  
[EXC3]  
Short Guiro  
Long Guiro  
Claves  
[EXC3]  
[EXC3]  
76  
High Wood Block  
Low Wood Block  
Mute Cuica  
Open Cuica  
Mute Triangle  
Open Triangle  
Shaker  
High Wood Block  
Low Wood Block  
Mute Cuica  
Open Cuica  
Mute Triangle  
Open Triangle  
Shaker  
High Wood Block  
Low Wood Block  
Mute Cuica  
Open Cuica  
Mute Triangle  
Open Triangle  
Shaker  
High Wood Block  
Low Wood Block  
Mute Cuica  
Open Cuica  
Mute Triangle  
Open Triangle  
Shaker  
77  
78  
80  
82  
[EXC4]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC5]  
79  
81  
83  
Jingle Bell  
Bell Tree  
Castanets  
Jingle Bell  
Bell Tree  
Castanets  
Jingle Bell  
Bell Tree  
Castanets  
Jingle Bell  
Bell Tree  
Castanets  
C6 84  
86  
85  
87  
Mute Surdo  
Open Surdo  
-----  
[EXC6]  
[EXC6]  
Mute Surdo  
Open Surdo  
-----  
[EXC6]  
[EXC6]  
Mute Surdo  
Open Surdo  
-----  
[EXC6]  
[EXC6]  
Mute Surdo  
Open Surdo  
-----  
[EXC6]  
[EXC6]  
88  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*
*
-----: No sound.  
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.  
JAZZ  
GS STANDARD Set  
TR-808 Set  
DANCE Set  
BRUSH Set  
21  
23  
24  
26  
28  
29  
31  
33  
35  
36  
38  
40  
41  
43  
45  
47  
-----  
-----  
-----  
Bar Chime  
Snare Roll  
Finger Snap  
High Q  
-----  
-----  
-----  
Bar Chime  
Snare Roll  
Finger Snap  
High Q  
-----  
-----  
-----  
Bar Chime  
Snare Roll  
Finger Snap  
High Q  
-----  
-----  
-----  
Bar Chime  
Snare Roll  
Finger Snap  
High Q  
22  
25  
27  
Slap  
Slap  
Slap  
Slap  
Scratch Push  
Scratch Pull  
Sticks  
Square Click  
Metronome Click  
Metronome Bell  
Std Kick 2  
808 Bass Drum 1  
808 Rim Shot  
808 Snare Drum  
Hand Clap  
Snare Drum 2  
808 Low Tom 2  
808 CHH  
[EXC7]  
[EXC7]  
Scratch Push  
Scratch Pull  
Dance Snr 1  
Square Click  
Metronome Click  
Metronome Bell  
Kick 1  
808 Bass Drum 2  
808 Rim Shot  
TR-909 Snr  
Hand Clap  
Dance Snr 2  
808 Low Tom 2  
808 CHH [EXC1]  
808 Low Tom 1  
808 CHH [EXC1]  
808 Mid Tom 2  
808 OHH [EXC1]  
808 Mid Tom 1  
808 Hi Tom 2  
808 Cymbal  
808 Hi Tom 1  
Ride Cymbal 1  
Chinese Cymbal  
Ride Bell  
Tambourine  
Splash Cymbal  
808 Cowbell  
Crash Cymbal 2  
Vibra-slap  
Ride Cymbal 2  
High Bongo  
Low Bongo  
808 High Conga  
808 Mid Conga  
808 Low Conga  
High Timbale  
Low Timbale  
High Agogo  
Low Agogo  
[EXC7]  
[EXC7]  
Scratch Push  
Scratch Pull  
Sticks  
Square Click  
Metronome Click  
Metronome Bell  
Std Kick 2  
Std Kick 1  
Side Stick  
Snare Drum 1  
Hand Clap  
Snare Drum 2  
Low Tom 2  
Closed Hi-hat 1  
Low Tom 1  
Pedal Hi-hat 1  
Mid Tom 2  
[EXC7]  
[EXC7]  
Scratch Push  
Scratch Pull  
Sticks  
Square Click  
Metronome Click  
Metronome Bell  
Kick 2  
Kick 1  
Side Stick  
Brush Tap  
[EXC7]  
[EXC7]  
30  
32  
34  
C2  
37  
39  
Brush Slap  
Brush Swirl  
Brush Low Tom 2  
Closed Hi-hat 2  
Brush Low Tom 1  
Pedal Hi-hat 2  
Brush Mid Tom 2  
Open Hi-hat 2  
Brush Mid Tom 1  
Brush Hi Tom 2  
Crash Cymbal 1  
Brush Hi Tom 1  
Ride Cymbal 1  
Chinese Cymbal  
Ride Bell  
Tambourine  
Splash Cymbal  
Cowbell  
Crash Cymbal 2  
Vibra-slap  
Ride Cymbal 2  
High Bongo  
Low Bongo  
Mute High Conga  
Open High Conga  
Low Conga  
High Timbale  
Low Timbale  
High Agogo  
Low Agogo  
Cabasa  
42  
44  
46  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
808 Low Tom 1  
808 CHH  
808 Mid Tom 2  
808 OHH [EXC1]  
808 Mid Tom 1  
808 Hi Tom 2  
808 Cymbal  
808 Hi Tom 1  
Ride Cymbal 1  
Chinese Cymbal  
Ride Bell  
Tambourine  
Splash Cymbal  
808 Cowbell  
Crash Cymbal 2  
Vibra-slap  
Ride Cymbal 2  
High Bongo  
Low Bongo  
808 High Conga  
808 Mid Conga  
808 Low Conga  
High Timbale  
Low Timbale  
High Agogo  
Low Agogo  
Cabasa  
Open Hi-hat 1  
Mid Tom 1  
High Tom 2  
Crash Cymbal 1  
High Tom 1  
Ride Cymbal 1  
Chinese Cymbal  
Ride Bell  
Tambourine  
Splash Cymbal  
Cowbell  
C3 48  
50  
49  
51  
52  
53  
54  
56  
58  
55  
57  
Crash Cymbal 2  
Vibra-slap  
59  
Ride Cymbal 2  
High Bongo  
Low Bongo  
Mute High Conga  
Open High Conga  
Low Conga  
High Timbale  
Low Timbale  
High Agogo  
Low Agogo  
Cabasa  
C4 60  
62  
61  
63  
64  
65  
66  
68  
70  
67  
69  
Cabasa  
808 Maracas  
Short Hi Whistle  
808 Maracas  
Short Hi Whistle  
Maracas  
Short Hi Whistle  
Maracas  
Short Hi Whistle  
71  
[EXC2]  
[EXC2]  
[EXC2]  
[EXC2]  
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]  
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]  
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]  
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]  
C5 72  
74  
73  
75  
Short Guiro  
Long Guiro  
808 Claves  
High Wood Block  
Low Wood Block  
Mute Cuica  
Open Cuica  
Mute Triangle  
Open Triangle  
Shaker  
[EXC3]  
[EXC3]  
Short Guiro  
Long Guiro  
808 Claves  
High Wood Block  
Low Wood Block  
Mute Cuica  
Open Cuica  
Mute Triangle  
Open Triangle  
Shaker  
[EXC3]  
[EXC3]  
Short Guiro  
Long Guiro  
Claves  
[EXC3]  
[EXC3]  
Short Guiro  
Long Guiro  
Claves  
[EXC3]  
[EXC3]  
76  
High Wood Block  
Low Wood Block  
Mute Cuica  
Open Cuica  
Mute Triangle  
Open Triangle  
Shaker  
High Wood Block  
Low Wood Block  
Mute Cuica  
Open Cuica  
Mute Triangle  
Open Triangle  
Shaker  
77  
78  
80  
82  
[EXC4]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC5]  
79  
81  
83  
Jingle Bell  
Bell Tree  
Castanets  
Jingle Bell  
Bell Tree  
Castanets  
Jingle Bell  
Bell Tree  
Castanets  
Jingle Bell  
Bell Tree  
Castanets  
C6 84  
86  
85  
87  
Mute Surdo  
Open Surdo  
-----  
[EXC6]  
[EXC6]  
Mute Surdo  
Open Surdo  
-----  
[EXC6]  
[EXC6]  
Mute Surdo  
Open Surdo  
-----  
[EXC6]  
[EXC6]  
Mute Surdo  
Open Surdo  
-----  
[EXC6]  
[EXC6]  
88  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*
*
-----: No sound.  
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.  
ORCHESTRA Set  
GS ROOM Set  
GS BRUSH Set  
21  
23  
24  
26  
28  
29  
31  
33  
35  
36  
38  
40  
41  
43  
45  
47  
-----  
-----  
-----  
-----  
-----  
-----  
Bar Chime  
Snare Roll  
Finger Snap  
High Q  
-----  
-----  
-----  
Bar Chime  
Snare Roll  
Finger Snap  
High Q  
Slap  
Scratch Push  
Scratch Pull  
Sticks  
Square Click  
Metronome Click  
Metronome Bell  
Std Kick 2  
22  
Bar Chime  
Snare Roll  
Finger Snap  
Close Hi-hat  
Pedal Hi-hat  
Open Hi-hat  
Ride Cymbal  
Sticks  
Square Click  
Metronome Click  
Metronome Bell  
Concert BD 2  
Concert BD 1  
Side Stick  
Concert SD  
Castanets  
Concert SD  
Timpani F  
Timpani F#  
Timpani G  
Timpani G#  
Timpani A  
25  
27  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
Slap  
Scratch Push  
Scratch Pull  
Sticks  
Square Click  
Metronome Click  
Metronome Bell  
Std Kick 2  
Std Kick 1  
Side Stick  
Snare Drum 1  
Hand Clap  
Snare Drum 2  
Room Low Tom 2  
Closed Hi-hat 1  
Room Low Tom 1  
Pedal Hi-hat 1  
Room Mid Tom 2  
Open Hi-hat 1  
Room Mid Tom 1  
Room Hi Tom 2  
Crash Cymbal 1  
Room Hi Tom 1  
Ride Cymbal 1  
Chinese Cymbal  
Ride Bell  
[EXC7]  
[EXC7]  
[EXC7]  
[EXC7]  
30  
32  
34  
Std Kick 1  
Side Stick  
Brush Tap  
C2  
37  
39  
Brush Slap  
Brush Swirl  
Low Tom 2  
Closed Hi-hat 1  
Low Tom 1  
Pedal Hi-hat 1  
Mid Tom 2  
Open Hi-hat 1  
Mid Tom 1  
High Tom 2  
Crash Cymbal 1  
High Tom 1  
Ride Cymbal 1  
Chinese Cymbal  
Ride Bell  
42  
44  
46  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
[EXC1]  
Timpani A#  
Timpani B  
Timpani c  
Timpani c#  
Timpani d  
Timpani d#  
Timpani e  
C3 48  
50  
49  
51  
52  
Timpani f  
53  
54  
56  
58  
Tambourine  
Splash Cymbal  
Cowbell  
Concert Cymbal 2  
Vibra-slap  
Tambourine  
Splash Cymbal  
Cowbell  
Crash Cymbal 2  
Vibra-slap  
Tambourine  
Splash Cymbal  
Cowbell  
Crash Cymbal 2  
Vibra-slap  
55  
57  
59  
Concert Cymbal 1  
High Bongo  
Low Bongo  
Mute High Conga  
Open High Conga  
Low Conga  
High Timbale  
Low Timbale  
High Agogo  
Low Agogo  
Cabasa  
Ride Cymbal 2  
High Bongo  
Low Bongo  
Mute High Conga  
Open High Conga  
Low Conga  
High Timbale  
Low Timbale  
High Agogo  
Low Agogo  
Cabasa  
Ride Cymbal 2  
High Bongo  
Low Bongo  
Mute High Conga  
Open High Conga  
Low Conga  
High Timbale  
Low Timbale  
High Agogo  
Low Agogo  
Cabasa  
C4 60  
62  
61  
63  
64  
65  
66  
68  
70  
67  
69  
Maracas  
Short Hi Whistle  
Maracas  
Short Hi Whistle  
Maracas  
Short Hi Whistle  
71  
[EXC2]  
[EXC2]  
[EXC2]  
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]  
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]  
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]  
C5 72  
74  
73  
75  
Short Guiro  
Long Guiro  
Claves  
[EXC3]  
[EXC3]  
Short Guiro  
Long Guiro  
Claves  
[EXC3]  
[EXC3]  
Short Guiro  
Long Guiro  
Claves  
[EXC3]  
[EXC3]  
76  
High Wood Block  
Low Wood Block  
Mute Cuica  
Open Cuica  
Mute Triangle  
Open Triangle  
Shaker  
High Wood Block  
Low Wood Block  
Mute Cuica  
Open Cuica  
Mute Triangle  
Open Triangle  
Shaker  
High Wood Block  
Low Wood Block  
Mute Cuica  
Open Cuica  
Mute Triangle  
Open Triangle  
Shaker  
77  
78  
80  
82  
[EXC4]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC4]  
[EXC5]  
[EXC5]  
79  
81  
83  
Jingle Bell  
Bell Tree  
Castanets  
Jingle Bell  
Bell Tree  
Castanets  
Jingle Bell  
Bell Tree  
Castanets  
C6 84  
86  
85  
87  
Mute Surdo  
Open Surdo  
Applause  
[EXC6]  
[EXC6]  
Mute Surdo  
Open Surdo  
-----  
[EXC6]  
[EXC6]  
Mute Surdo  
Open Surdo  
-----  
[EXC6]  
[EXC6]  
88  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SFX Set List  
*
*
-----: No sound.  
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.  
SFX Set 1  
21  
23  
24  
26  
28  
29  
31  
33  
35  
36  
38  
40  
41  
43  
45  
47  
-----  
-----  
-----  
-----  
-----  
-----  
-----  
-----  
-----  
-----  
-----  
-----  
-----  
-----  
-----  
-----  
22  
25  
27  
30  
32  
34  
C2  
-----  
-----  
High Q  
Slap  
Scratch Push [EXC7]  
Scratch Pull  
Sticks  
37  
39  
[EXC7]  
42  
44  
46  
Square Click  
Metronome Click  
Metronome Bell  
Guitar sliding Finger  
Guitar cutting noise (up)  
Guitar cutting noise (down)  
String slap of double bass  
Fl.Key Click  
Laughing  
Screaming  
Punch  
Heart Beat  
Footsteps1  
Footsteps2  
Applause  
Door Creaking  
Door  
C3 48  
50  
49  
51  
52  
53  
54  
56  
58  
55  
57  
59  
C4 60  
62  
Scratch  
61  
63  
Wind Chimes  
Car-Engine  
Car-Stop  
Car-Pass  
Car-Crash  
Siren  
Train  
Jetplane  
Helicopter  
Starship  
64  
65  
66  
68  
70  
67  
69  
71  
Gun Shot  
Machine Gun  
Lasergun  
Explosion  
Dog  
C5 72  
74  
73  
75  
76  
Horse-Gallop  
Birds  
Rain  
Thunder  
Wind  
77  
78  
80  
82  
79  
81  
Seashore  
Stream  
83  
Bubble  
Cat  
Bird  
C6 84  
86  
85  
87  
BabyLaughing  
Boeeeen  
Glass & Glam  
Ice Ring  
Crack Bottle  
Pour Bottle  
Car Horn  
R.Crossing  
SL 1  
88  
89  
90  
92  
94  
91  
93  
95  
SL 2  
Seal  
Fancy Animal  
-----  
96  
98  
C7  
97  
99  
100  
101  
-----  
-----  
Small Club  
-----  
-----  
102  
104  
103  
105  
-----  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effects List  
Display  
Description  
Display  
Description  
Applies a light chorus effect with slow  
undulations  
Applies both overdrive and chorus  
effects.  
Overdrive  
-> Chorus  
GS Chorus 1  
GS Chorus 2  
GS Chorus 3  
GS Chorus 4  
Applies a light chorus effect with quick  
undulations  
Applies both overdrive and anger  
effects.  
Overdrive  
-> Flanger  
Applies a deep chorus effect with slow  
undulations  
Applies both overdrive and delay  
effects.  
Overdrive -> Delay  
Applies a deep chorus effect with quick  
undulations  
Applies both distortion and chorus  
effects.  
Distortion  
-> Chorus  
GS Feedback  
Chorus  
Applies both distortion and anger  
effects.  
Distortion  
-> Flanger  
A soft sound with a anger effect  
An effect that sounds like a jet planes  
ascent/descent  
Applies both distortion and delay  
effects.  
GS Flanger  
Distortion -> Delay  
GS Short Delay  
A short echo effect  
Applies a resonance effect when the  
damper pedal is depressed.  
Sympathetic  
Resonance  
GS Short Delay  
(Feedback)  
A short echo with many repetitions  
Stereo Chorus  
Hexa Chorus  
Tremolo Chorus  
Space D  
A stereo chorus.  
A multilayer chorus.  
A chorus with a tremolo effect.  
A clear chorus.  
Rotary  
Adds a rotary-speaker effect.  
Delays the sound with a stereo effect.  
Stereo Delay  
Adds a wavering effect to the delayed  
sound.  
Modulation Delay  
Triple Tap Delay  
A three-way delay.  
A four-way delay.  
Quadruple  
Tap Delay  
Phaser  
Adds undulations to the sound.  
Adds metallic reverberations.  
Stereo Flanger  
A anger that varies the pitch in a  
stepwise fashion.  
Step Flanger  
Enhancer  
Overdrive  
Distortion  
Auto Wah  
Compressor  
Adds modulation to the sound.  
Applies soft distortion to the sound.  
Applies hard distortion to the sound.  
Changes the tone in a cyclical manner.  
Suppresses uctuations in volume.  
Cuts off the reverberations before they  
fade away completely.  
Gate Reverb  
Adds two pitch-shifted sounds to the  
original sound (two-voice pitch shifter).  
2V Pitch Shifter  
FB Pitch Shifter  
The pitch will change in steps (feedback  
pitch shifter).  
Applies both enhancer and chorus  
effects.  
Enhancer  
-> Chorus  
Applies both enhancer and anger  
effects.  
Enhancer  
-> Flanger  
Enhancer -> Delay  
Chorus -> Delay  
Flanger -> Delay  
Applies both enhancer and delay effects.  
Applies both chorus and delay effects.  
Applies both anger and delay effects.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chord List  
*
*
G symbol : Indicates the constituent note of chords.  
# symbol : Chord shown with an “#”can be played by pressing just the key marked with the “#” (p. 37).  
C
C#  
D
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
F
Cmaj7  
C7  
C#maj7  
C#7  
Dmaj7  
D7  
maj7  
7
Emaj7  
E7  
Fmaj7  
F7  
Cm  
C#m  
Dm  
m
Em  
Fm  
Cm7  
Cdim  
C#m7  
C#dim  
Dm7  
Ddim  
m7  
dim  
Em7  
Edim  
Fm7  
Fdim  
Cm7 ( 5 )  
C#m7 ( 5 )  
C#aug  
Dm7 ( 5 )  
E
E
E
E
E
E
m7 ( 5 )  
Em7 ( 5 )  
Fm7 ( 5 )  
Caug  
Daug  
aug  
Eaug  
Faug  
Csus4  
C7sus4  
C6  
C#sus4  
C#7sus4  
C#6  
Dsus4  
D7sus4  
D6  
sus4  
7sus4  
6
Esus4  
E7sus4  
E6  
Fsus4  
F7sus4  
F6  
Cm6  
C#m6  
Dm6  
m6  
Em6  
Fm6  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
*
*
G symbol : Indicates the constituent note of chords.  
# symbol : Chord shown with an “#”can be played by pressing just the key marked with the “#” (p. 37).  
F#  
G
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
F#maj7  
F#7  
Gmaj7  
G7  
maj7  
7
Amaj7  
A7  
maj7  
7
Bmaj7  
B7  
F#m  
Gm  
m
Am  
m
Bm  
F#m7  
F#dim  
F#m7 ( 5 )  
F#aug  
F#sus4  
Gm7  
Gdim  
Gm7 ( 5 )  
Gaug  
Gsus4  
m7  
Am7  
Adim  
Am7 ( 5 )  
Aaug  
Asus4  
m7  
Bm7  
Bdim  
Bm7 ( 5 )  
Baug  
Bsus4  
dim  
dim  
m7 ( 5 )  
aug  
sus4  
m7 ( 5 )  
aug  
sus4  
F#7sus4  
F#6  
G7sus4  
G6  
A
A
7sus4  
6
A7sus4  
A6  
B
B
7sus4  
6
B7sus4  
B6  
F#m6  
Gm6  
A
m6  
Am6  
B
m6  
Bm6  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Internal Song List  
[Masterpieces]  
[Practice]  
[Folks]  
Sonate No.15  
Liebestraume 3  
Etude, op.10-3  
Je te veux  
Beyer 15  
Beyer 21  
Beyer 25  
Beyer 29  
Annie Laurie  
Londonderry Air  
Amazing Grace  
Ave Maria  
Valse, op.64-1  
Beyer 34  
Entertainer  
Golliwog'sCakewalk  
FantaisieImpromptu  
Arabesque 1  
Beyer 38  
Beyer 42  
Beyer 46  
Beyer 51  
Greensleeves  
Hallelujah!  
Little Brown Jug  
Marchin' In  
Blauen Donau  
Auf Flugeln des Gesanges  
Mazurka No.5  
Beyer 55  
Beyer 60  
Stagecoach  
Gymnopedie 1  
Etude, op.25-1  
Beyer 64  
Beyer 67  
[Kids]  
Old MacDonald Had A Farm  
Twinkle Twinkle, Little Star  
MaryHadALittleLamb  
London Bridge  
Clair de Lune  
Etude, op.10-5  
Beyer 73  
Beyer 78  
Beyer 81  
Beyer 90  
Beyer 93  
Beyer 98  
Beyer 103  
Czerny 100- 1  
Czerny 100-10  
Czerny 100-20  
Czerny 100-30  
Czerny 100-38  
Czerny 100-43  
Czerny 100-60  
Czerny 100-75  
Czerny 100-86  
Czerny 100-96  
Openness  
Dr.GradusAdParnassum  
Grande Valse Brillante  
La priere d'une Vierge  
Course en Troika  
To The Spring  
Valse, op.64-2  
Radetzky Marsch  
Traumerei  
Moments Musicaux 3  
Prelude, op.28-15  
Harmonious Blacksmith  
Ungarische Tanze 5  
Turkischer Marsch(Beethoven)  
Nocturne No.2  
Jingle Bells  
Silent Night, Holy Night  
Joy To The World  
Grandfather'sClock  
Puppy's March  
Frog Song  
Little Fox  
Lightly Row  
The Cuckoo  
[Jazzy]  
Preludelight  
Blue Sky Rag  
Secret Agent  
Fruhlingslied  
Praludium  
Late Night Chopin  
Fly Free  
Sun Daze  
Jagerlied  
Menuet Antique  
Fur Elise  
Turkischer Marsch(Mozart)  
Standchen  
Humoreske  
Arabesque  
Pastoral  
A Small Gathering  
Innocence  
Progress  
The Clear Stream  
Gracefulness  
The Hunt  
Tender Flower  
The Young Shepherdess  
Farewell  
Consolation  
Austrian Dance  
Ballad  
Keepers Tale  
Count On The Blues  
One Down And Easy  
A Prelude To ...  
Bach's A Boppin'  
Kismet's Salsa  
Blumenlied  
Alpenglockchen  
Menuett G dur(Beethoven)  
Venezianisches Gondellied  
Alpenabendrote  
Farewell to the Piano  
Brautchor  
Battle of Waterloo  
Wiener Marsch  
Le Coucou  
Menuett G dur(Bach)  
Spinnerlied  
Gavotte  
Heidenroslein  
Zigeuner Tanz  
La Cinquantaine  
Csikos Post  
Dolly's Dreaming Awakening  
La Violette  
Frohlicher Landmann  
Sonatine op.36-1(Clementi)  
Sonatine op.20-1(Kuhlau)  
Sonatine No.5(Beethoven)  
From Matthew's Passion  
Roll Over Ludwig  
[Easy Classical]  
Canon (Pachelbel)  
Ombra maifu  
O'sole Mio  
Les patineurs, Valse  
Brindisi  
Sighing  
The Chatterbox  
Restlessness  
Ave Maria  
Tarantella  
Die Lorelei  
Traumerei  
Angelic Harmony  
Gondola Song  
The Return  
The Swallow  
The Knight Errant  
Invention 1  
Invention 2  
Invention 3  
Invention 4  
Invention 5  
Invention 6  
Invention 7  
Invention 8  
Invention 9  
Invention 10  
Invention 11  
Invention 12  
Invention 13  
Invention 14  
Invention 15  
Liebestraume 3  
Prelude, op.28-15  
Grande Valse Brillante  
Mondschein  
FantaisieImpromptu  
Valse, op.64-1  
Air sul G  
Gymnopédie 1  
Ungarische Tanze 5  
Turkischer Marsch(Mozart)  
Nocturne No.2  
*
All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of  
this material for purposes other than  
private, personal enjoyment is a violation  
of applicable laws.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Parameters Stored to Internal Memory  
Parameters Stored in the User Program  
“Saving Performance Settings (User Program)” (p. 93)  
“Remembering the Settings Even When the Power is Turned Off (Memory  
Backup)” (p. 138)  
Parameters that switch immediately after the User Pro-  
gram name is touched when <Option> on the User Pro-  
gram screen is set to Delayed”  
Octave Shift  
Tone  
Parameters  
Effects: On/Off, Type, Depth  
Rotary effect (Slow/Fast),  
Organ  
One-Touch Piano Settings:  
Lid, Tuning (Tuning, Key, Stretch Tunings),  
Resonance,  
Footage (Upper, Lower), Percussion  
Selected  
Key Touch,  
Right-hand  
Tone, Octave Shift,  
Tone, Layer  
String Resonance,  
Effect (Type, Depth, On/Off)  
Tone,  
Hammer Response (On/Off, Depth)  
Left-hand Tone  
Metronome: Sound  
Count-In: Measures, Sound  
Countdown: Sound  
Language  
System  
Bass Tone, Chord Tone  
Parameters  
Part Balance  
Keyboard Parts  
Melody  
On/Off, Type  
Intelligent  
Opening Message  
Touch Screen  
Split On/Off, Layer On/Off,  
Lower On/Off,  
Keyboard Mode  
Track Assign  
Keyboard Transpose, Split Point  
Reverb: On/Off, Type, Depth  
Functions assigning to the left pedal and  
center pedal  
Pedal Settings  
Performance  
Pad Settings  
Style Orchestrator, User Function  
Style Orchestrator values assigning the Pads  
Keyboard settings  
(One-Touch Piano/ One-Touch Arranger/Others)  
Reverb  
On/Off, Type, Depth  
Bend Range  
MIDI Settings for  
User Program  
PC Number, Bank Select LSB,  
Bank Select MSB, Program Change  
Parameters that switch after the User Program name is  
touched for a few moments when <Option> on the User  
Program screen is set to Delayed”  
Music Style  
Tempo  
Part Balance  
Accompaniment Part  
Accompaniment On/Off,  
Chord Intelligence On/Off,  
Leading Bass On/Off, Original/Variation,  
Sync Start On/Off,  
Arranger  
Settings  
<Accomp> setting for  
Arranger Configuration,  
Style Orchestrator, Division  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Music Files That the KR105 Can Use  
What Are Music Files?  
I About the KR105s Sound  
Music Files contain information describing the details of a  
Generator  
musical performance, such as the C3 key on a keyboard was  
The KR105 comes equipped with GM 2/GS sound generators.  
pressed for this amount of time, using this amount of  
force.By inserting the floppy disk into the disk drive on the  
General MIDI  
KR105, the performance information is sent from the floppy  
The General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to  
disk to the piano, and played faithfully by the piano. This is  
provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary designs,  
different than a CD, since the music file does not contain a  
and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound generating devices.  
recording of the sound itself. This makes it possible to erase  
Sound generating devices and music files that meets the General  
certain parts, or to change instruments, tempos and keys  
MIDI standard bears the General MIDI logo. Music files bearing the  
freely, allowing you to use it in many different ways.  
General MIDI logo can be played back using any General MIDI  
sound generating unit to produce essentially the same musical  
performance.  
Regarding Copyright  
Use of the song data supplied with the Data Disk attached to  
this product for any purpose other than private, personal  
enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder is  
prohibited by law. Additionally, this data must not be  
copied, nor used in a secondary copyrighted work without  
the permission of the copyright holder.  
General MIDI 2  
The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 recommendations pick up  
where the original General MIDI left off, offering enhanced  
expressive capabilities, and even greater compatibility. Issues that  
were not covered by the original General MIDI recommendations,  
such as how sounds are to be edited, and how effects should be  
handled, have now been precisely defined. Moreover, the available  
sounds have been expanded. General MIDI 2 compliant sound  
generators are capable of reliably playing back music files that carry  
either the General MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo.  
I The KR105 allows you to use  
the following music files  
G Floppy disks saved on a Roland MT Series, or Roland Piano  
Digital HP-G/R and KR Series instrument  
In some cases, the conventional form of General MIDI, which does  
not include the new enhancements, is referred to as General MIDI  
1as a way of distinguishing it from General MIDI 2.  
G Roland Digital Piano Compatible Music Files  
Rolands original music file is made specifically for practicing the  
piano. Some follow an instructional curriculum, allowing for a  
complete range of lessons, such as practicing each hand  
separatelyor listening to only the accompaniment.”  
GS Format  
The GS Format is Rolands set of specifications for standardizing the  
performance of sound generating devices. In addition to including  
support for everything defined by the General MIDI, the highly  
compatible GS Format additionally offers an expanded number of  
sounds, provides for the editing of sounds, and spells out many  
details for a wide range of extra features, including effects such as  
reverb and chorus. Designed with the future in mind, the GS Format  
can readily include new sounds and support new hardware features  
when they arrive. Since it is upwardly compatible with the General  
MIDI, Rolands GS Format is capable of reliably playing back GM  
Scores equally as well as it performs GS music files (music files that  
have been created with the GS Format in mind). This product  
supports both the General MIDI 2 and the GS Format, and can be  
used to play back music data carrying either of these logos.  
G SMF Music Files (720KB/1.44MB format)  
SMFs (Standard MIDI Files) use a standard format for music file  
that was formulated so that files containing music file could be  
widely compatible, regardless of the manufacturer of the  
listening device. An enormous variety of music is available,  
whether it be for listening, for practicing musical instruments, for  
Karaoke, etc.  
*
If you wish to purchase SMF Music Files, please consult the retailer  
where you purchased your KR105.  
SMF with Lyrics  
SMF with Lyricsrefers to SMF (Standard MIDI File) that  
contains the lyrics. When Music Files carrying the SMF with  
Lyricslogo are played back on a compatible device (one  
bearing the same logo), the lyrics will appear in its display.  
XG lite  
XG is a tone generator format of YAMAHA Corporation, that  
defines the ways in which voices are expanded or edited and the  
structure and type of effects, in addition to the General MIDI 1  
specification. XGlite is a simplified version of XG tone generation  
format. You can play back any XG music files using an XGlite tone  
generator. However, keep in mind that some music files may play  
back differently compared to the original files, due to the reduced set  
of control parameters and effects.  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
DIGITAL PIANO  
Model KR105  
Date : May 2005  
Version : 1.00  
MIDI Implementation Chart  
Transmitted  
Recognized  
Remarks  
Function...  
Basic  
Channel  
Default  
Changed  
1
1
116  
116  
16  
Default  
Messages  
Altered  
Mode 3  
x
Mode 3  
Mode 3, 4 (M=1)  
* 2  
Mode  
**************  
Note  
Number :  
15113  
**************  
0127  
0127  
True Voice  
Note ON  
Note OFF  
O
x
O
x
Velocity  
8n v=64  
*1  
*1  
After  
Touch  
Key s  
Ch s  
x
x
O
O
Pitch Bend  
O
O
0, 32  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
Bank select  
Modulation  
Portamento time  
Data entry  
1
O
*1  
*1  
*1  
5
6, 38  
7
O
O
O
Volume  
10  
O
Panpot  
*1  
*1  
11  
O
Expression  
Hold 1  
Control  
Change  
64  
O
65  
O
Portamento  
Sostenuto  
*1  
66  
O
67  
O
Soft  
84  
O
Portamento control  
Effect1 depth  
Effect3 depth  
NRPN LSB, MSB  
RPN LSB, MSB  
*1  
91  
O (Reverb)  
93  
O (Chorus)  
98, 99  
100, 101  
O
O
*1  
*1  
Prog  
Change  
0127  
**************  
O
: True #  
0127  
Program number 1128  
System Exclusive  
O
O
: Song Pos  
: Song Sel  
: Tune  
x
x
x
x
x
x
System  
Common  
System  
Real Time  
: Clock  
: Commands  
O
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
O
x
O (120, 126, 127)  
: All sound off  
O
:
Reset all controllers  
Aux  
Message  
O
: Local Control  
: All Notes OFF  
: Active Sense  
: Reset  
O (123125)  
O
x
* 1 O x is selectable by SysEx.  
* 2 Recognized as M=1 even if M=1.  
Notes  
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY  
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO  
O : Yes  
X : No  
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main Specifications  
Copy  
Delete  
Erase  
Part Exchange  
PC Edit  
Quantize  
Insert  
Transpose  
Note Edit  
<Keyboard>  
88 keys (Progressive hammer action  
keyboard with escapement)  
100 levels  
Whole  
Split (adjustable split point)  
Layer  
Arranger  
Piano Style Arranger  
Manual Drums / SFX  
Keyboard  
Edit  
Touch Sensitivity  
Keyboard Mode  
Touch the Notes  
Replay  
Super Tones  
Piano Designer  
Visual Lesson  
Wonderland/Game  
Demo  
Other Functions  
<Sound Generator>  
Conforms to GM2 / GS / XG Lite  
Max. Polyphony  
Tones  
(Tone Search by  
terms and by letters)  
Temperament  
Stretched Tuning  
Audition  
Panel Lock  
User Image Display  
BMP Export  
V-LINK  
64 voices  
6 groups, 630 variations (including 4 tone  
wheel organs, 15drum sets, 1 SFX set)  
8 types, selectable tonic  
2 types  
<Internal Memory>  
InternalSongs(Song  
415.3 Hz466.2 Hz (adjustable in  
increments of 0.1 Hz)  
Key Transpose (-6+5 in units of semitone)  
Playback Transpose (-24+24 in units of  
semitone)  
Search by terms and Over 170 songs  
by letters)  
Master Tuning  
Max. 200 songs on Favorites  
Max. 99 User Styles  
Max. 99 User Program Sets  
Transpose  
User Memory  
Reverb (8 types)  
Chorus  
<Others>  
Rated Power Output 40W x 2  
Speakers  
Effects  
Sympathetic Resonance, Rotary and 32  
other types  
20 cm x2, 6 cm x2  
Bouncing Beat Indicator  
Display  
<Arranger>  
Music Styles  
Graphical LCD 320 x 240 dot (backlit)  
Grand staff / G Clef staff / F Clef staff,  
with note name /lyrics/ chords / ngering  
English / German / French / Spanish  
Yes (built-in, external display, MIDI output)  
One Touch Piano  
6 groups, 230 styles x 3 types (Style  
Orchestrator)  
Notation  
(Style Search by  
terms and by letters)  
Music Assistant  
(Search by terms  
and by letters)  
Programmable  
Music Styles  
Language  
Lyrics  
Over 330 sets x 6 presets  
Visual Music Assistant  
One Touch Program  
One Touch Arranger  
Style Converter  
Style Composer  
Damper Pedal (half-pedal recognition)  
Soft Pedal (half-pedal recognition,  
functions assignable)  
Melody Intelligence 24 types  
Pedals  
Sostenuto Pedal (functions assignable)  
Echo  
Output jacks (L/Mono, R)  
Input jacks (L/Mono, R)  
<User Programs>  
Internal  
Floppy disk  
Vocal Effects  
36  
Max. 99 sets  
Mic Input jack  
Headphones jack (Stereo) x 2  
MIDI In connector x 2  
MIDI Out connector  
USB connector  
Expression Pedal jack  
AC 110/117V, AC 230/240V  
1421 (W) x 550 (D) x 901 (H) mm  
Including the music rest  
1421 (W) x 550 (D) x 1106 (H) mm  
<Metronome>  
Tempo  
Connectors  
Quarter note = 10500  
2/2, 0/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/4, 7/4, 3/8,  
6/8, 9/8, 12/8  
10 levels  
11 patterns  
8 types  
Beat  
Volume  
Metronome Pattern  
Metronome Sound  
Power Supply  
Dimensions  
(including the piano  
stand)  
<Composer>  
Tracks  
Weights (including  
the piano stand)  
80kg  
5 tracks / 16 tracks  
Song  
1 song  
Quick Start  
Note Storage  
Resolution  
Approx. 30,000 notes  
120 ticks per quarter note  
Realtime (Replace, Mix, Auto Punch In,  
Manual Punch In, Loop, Tempo)  
Step (Chord Sequencer)  
Beat Map  
Owners Manual  
USB Installation Guide  
CD-ROM (Roland Digital Piano USB  
Driver)  
Accessories  
Recording Method  
Power cord  
* In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/  
or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior  
notice.  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Index  
Numerics  
A
A.Bass 47  
Auto Punch-In/Out 105  
B
Basic Screen 19  
Bass  
Drum Set List 158  
Leading 47  
Beat  
[Brilliance] knob 17  
Erasing  
C
Clef L 64  
Clef R 64  
Composer MIDI Out 147  
Computer 149  
To Original 35  
To Variation 35  
Finder  
Connecting  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
Format 85  
G
GS 168  
H
Harmony 49  
I
Icon 19  
Intro 35, 43  
[Intro/Ending] button 43  
K
Key 64  
O
L
Layer 25  
Lid 16  
Lower Tone 50  
P
M
Percussion 22  
Melody Intelligence 49  
Memory Backup 138  
Performance Pad 48, 126  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Piano 20  
Saving as image data 65  
Preset 39  
PU (Pickup) 84  
Q
Quick Tour  
R
Reset 55  
User Program screen 93  
Root note 37  
S
SMF 168  
User Style 121  
Score 61  
Music files 168  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information  
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland  
distributor in your country as shown below.  
PHILIPPINES  
COSTA RICA  
TRINIDAD  
NORWAY  
KUWAIT  
AFRICA  
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.  
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue  
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,  
PHILIPPINES  
JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos  
Musicales  
AMR Ltd  
Roland Scandinavia Avd.  
EASA HUSAIN AL-YOUSIFI  
& SONS CO.  
Ground Floor  
Kontor Norge  
EGYPT  
Al Fanny Trading Office  
9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany  
Street,  
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,  
Cairo 11341, EGYPT  
TEL: 20-2-417-1828  
Maritime Plaza  
Barataria Trinidad W.I.  
TEL: (868)638 6385  
Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado 10237,  
San Jose, COSTA RICA  
TEL: 258-0211  
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95  
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo  
NORWAY  
Abdullah Salem Street,  
Safat, KUWAIT  
TEL: 243-6399  
TEL: (02) 899 9801  
TEL: 2273 0074  
SINGAPORE  
URUGUAY  
Todo Musica S.A.  
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa  
1771  
C.P.: 11.800  
Montevideo, URUGUAY  
TEL: (02) 924-2335  
CURACAO  
Zeelandia Music Center Inc.  
Orionweg 30  
Curacao, Netherland Antilles  
TEL:(305)5926866  
LEBANON  
Chahine S.A.L.  
Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine  
Bldg., Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-  
5857  
Beirut, LEBANON  
TEL: (01) 20-1441  
POLAND  
MX MUSIC SP.Z.O.O.  
UL. Gibraltarska 4.  
PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND  
TEL: (022) 679 44 19  
CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE LTD  
Blk 3014, Bedok Industrial Park E,  
#02-2148, SINGAPORE 489980  
TEL: 6243-9555  
REUNION  
Maison FO - YAM Marcel  
25 Rue Jules Hermann,  
Chaudron - BP79 97 491  
Ste Clotilde Cedex,  
TAIWAN  
ROLAND TAIWAN  
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.  
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung  
Shan N.Road Sec.2, Taipei,  
TAIWAN, R.O.C.  
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC  
Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez  
Calle Proyecto Central No.3  
Ens.La Esperilla  
Santo Domingo,  
Dominican Republic  
TEL:(809) 683 0305  
PORTUGAL  
Roland Iberia, S.L.  
Portugal Office  
Cais das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto  
4050-465, Porto, PORTUGAL  
TEL: 22 608 00 60  
VENEZUELA  
Instrumentos Musicales  
Allegro,C.A.  
Av.las industrias edf.Guitar  
OMAN  
REUNION ISLAND  
TEL: (0262) 218-429  
TALENTZ CENTRE L.L.C.  
P.O. BOX 37, MUSCAT,  
POSTAL CODE 113  
TEL: 931-3705  
SOUTH AFRICA  
That Other Music Shop(PTY)Ltd.  
11 Melle St., Braamfontein,  
Johannesbourg,  
SOUTH AFRICA  
TEL: (011) 403 4105  
TEL: (02) 2561 3339  
import  
#7 zona Industrial de Turumo  
Caracas, Venezuela  
TEL: (212) 244-1122  
ROMANIA  
FBS LINES  
Piata Libertatii 1,  
535500 Gheorgheni,  
ROMANIA  
QATAR  
Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio &  
Stores)  
P.O. Box 62, Doha, QATAR  
TEL: 4423-554  
THAILAND  
ECUADOR  
Mas Musika  
Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma  
Guayaquil - Ecuador  
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.  
330 Verng NakornKasem, Soi 2,  
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND  
TEL: (02) 2248821  
FAX: (011) 403 1234  
EUROPE  
TEL:(593-4)2302364  
TEL: (266) 364 609  
Paul Bothner(PTY)Ltd.  
17 Werdmuller Centre,  
Main Road, Claremont 7708  
SOUTH AFRICA  
VIETNAM  
Saigon Music  
Suite DP-8  
40 Ba Huyen Thanh Quan Street  
Hochiminh City, VIETNAM  
TEL: (08) 930-1969  
SAUDI ARABIA  
aDawliah Universal  
Electronics APL  
Corniche Road, Aldossary  
Bldg., 1st Floor, Alkhobar,  
SAUDI ARABIA  
EL SALVADOR  
OMNI MUSIC  
75 Avenida Norte y Final  
Alameda Juan Pablo II,  
Edificio No.4010 San Salvador,  
EL SALVADOR  
AUSTRIA  
Roland Elektronische  
Musikinstrumente HmbH.  
RUSSIA  
MuTek  
3-Bogatyrskaya Str. 1.k.l  
107 564 Moscow, RUSSIA  
TEL: (095) 169 5043  
TEL: (021) 674 4030  
Austrian Office  
Eduard-Bodem-Gasse 8,  
A-6020 Innsbruck, AUSTRIA  
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260  
TEL: 262-0788  
SPAIN  
ASIA  
P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952  
SAUDI ARABIA  
TEL: (03) 898 2081  
Roland Iberia, S.L.  
Paseo García Faria, 33-35  
08005 Barcelona SPAIN  
TEL: 93 493 91 00  
GUATEMALA  
BELGIUM/FRANCE/  
HOLLAND/  
LUXEMBOURG  
Roland Central Europe N.V.  
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel  
(Westerlo) BELGIUM  
CHINA  
Roland Shanghai Electronics  
Co.,Ltd.  
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road  
Shanghai 200090, CHINA  
TEL: (021) 5580-0800  
AUSTRALIA/  
NEW ZEALAND  
AUSTRALIA/  
NEW ZEALAND  
Roland Corporation  
Australia Pty.,Ltd.  
38 Campbell Avenue  
Dee Why West. NSW 2099  
AUSTRALIA  
Casa Instrumental  
Calzada Roosevelt 34-01,zona 11  
Ciudad de Guatemala  
Guatemala  
SYRIA  
Technical Light & Sound  
Center  
Rawda, Abdul Qader Jazairi St.  
Bldg. No. 21, P.O.BOX 13520,  
Damascus, SYRIA  
SWEDEN  
TEL:(502) 599-2888  
Roland Scandinavia A/S  
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE  
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.  
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN  
TEL: (0)8 702 00 20  
HONDURAS  
Almacen Pajaro Azul S.A. de C.V.  
BO.Paz Barahona  
3 Ave.11 Calle S.O  
San Pedro Sula, Honduras  
TEL: (504) 553-2029  
TEL: (014) 575811  
Roland Shanghai Electronics  
Co.,Ltd.  
(BEIJING OFFICE)  
10F. No.18 3 Section Anhuaxili  
Chaoyang District Beijing  
100011 CHINA  
CZECH REP.  
K-AUDIO  
Kardasovska 626.  
CZ-198 00 Praha 9,  
CZECH REP.  
TEL: (011) 223-5384  
TURKEY  
Ant Muzik Aletleri Ithalat Ve  
Ihracat Ltd Sti  
Siraselviler Caddesi  
Siraselviler Pasaji No:74/20  
Taksim - Istanbul, TURKEY  
TEL: (0212) 2449624  
SWITZERLAND  
Roland (Switzerland) AG  
Landstrasse 5, Postfach,  
CH-4452 Itingen,  
SWITZERLAND  
TEL: (061) 927-8383  
For Australia  
MARTINIQUE  
Musique & Son  
Z.I.Les Mangle  
97232 Le Lamantin  
Martinique F.W.I.  
TEL: 596 596 426860  
Tel: (02) 9982 8266  
For New Zealand  
Tel: (09) 3098 715  
TEL: (2) 666 10529  
TEL: (010) 6426-5050  
DENMARK  
Roland Shanghai Electronics  
Co.,Ltd.  
(GUANGZHOU OFFICE)  
2/F., No.30 Si You Nan Er Jie  
Yi Xiang, Wu Yang Xin Cheng,  
Guangzhou 510600, CHINA  
TEL: (020) 8736-0428  
Roland Scandinavia A/S  
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,  
DK-2100 Copenhagen  
DENMARK  
UKRAINE  
TIC-TAC  
Mira Str. 19/108  
P.O. Box 180  
295400 Munkachevo,  
UKRAINE  
TEL: (03131) 414-40  
U.A.E.  
Zak Electronics & Musical  
Instruments Co. L.L.C.  
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,  
No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai,  
U.A.E.  
CENTRAL/LATIN  
AMERICA  
Gigamusic SARL  
10 Rte De La Folie  
97200 Fort De France  
Martinique F.W.I.  
TEL: 596 596 715222  
TEL: 3916 6200  
FINLAND  
Roland Scandinavia As, Filial  
Finland  
Elannontie 5  
FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND  
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020  
ARGENTINA  
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.  
Av.Santa Fe 2055  
(1123) Buenos Aires  
ARGENTINA  
TEL: (011) 4508-2700  
HONG KONG  
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.  
Service Division  
22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen  
Wan, New Territories,  
HONG KONG  
TEL: (04) 3360715  
UNITED KINGDOM  
MEXICO  
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.  
Atlantic Close, Swansea  
Enterprise Park, SWANSEA  
SA7 9FJ,  
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.  
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar  
de los Padres 01780 Mexico  
D.F. MEXICO  
NORTH AMERICA  
GERMANY  
Roland Elektronische  
Musikinstrumente HmbH.  
Oststrasse 96, 22844  
Norderstedt, GERMANY  
TEL: (040) 52 60090  
BARBADOS  
TEL: 2415 0911  
CANADA  
Roland Canada Music Ltd.  
(Head Office)  
5480 Parkwood Way  
Richmond B. C., V6V 2M4  
CANADA  
UNITED KINGDOM  
TEL: (01792) 702701  
A&B Music Supplies LTD  
12 Webster Industrial Park  
Wildey, St.Michael, Barbados  
TEL: (246)430-1100  
TEL: (55) 5668-6699  
Parsons Music Ltd.  
NICARAGUA  
Bansbach Instrumentos  
Musicales Nicaragua  
Altamira D'Este Calle Principal  
de la Farmacia 5ta.Avenida  
1 Cuadra al Lago.#503  
Managua, Nicaragua  
8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39  
Chatham Road South, T.S.T,  
Kowloon, HONG KONG  
TEL: 2333 1863  
MIDDLE EAST  
BRAZIL  
Roland Brasil Ltda.  
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B  
Parque Industrial San Jose  
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL  
TEL: (011) 4615 5666  
GREECE  
STOLLAS S.A.  
Music Sound Light  
155, New National Road  
Patras 26442, GREECE  
TEL: 2610 435400  
TEL: (604) 270 6626  
INDIA  
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.  
409, Nirman Kendra  
Mahalaxmi Flats Compound  
Off. Dr. Edwin Moses Road,  
Mumbai-400011, INDIA  
TEL: (022) 2493 9051  
BAHRAIN  
Moon Stores  
No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,  
P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,  
State of BAHRAIN  
Roland Canada Music Ltd.  
(Toronto Office)  
170 Admiral Boulevard  
Mississauga On L5T 2N6  
CANADA  
TEL: (505)277-2557  
PANAMA  
CHILE  
Comercial Fancy II S.A.  
Rut.: 96.919.420-1  
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor  
Santiago - Centro, CHILE  
TEL: (02) 688-9540  
SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A.  
Boulevard Andrews, Albrook,  
Panama City, REP. DE  
PANAMA  
TEL: 17 211 005  
HUNGARY  
TEL: (905) 362 9707  
Roland East Europe Ltd.  
Warehouse Area DEPOPf.83  
H-2046 Torokbalint,  
HUNGARY  
CYPRUS  
Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.  
17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia,  
CYPRUS  
INDONESIA  
PT Citra IntiRama  
J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150  
Jakarta Pusat  
INDONESIA  
TEL: (021) 6324170  
U. S. A.  
TEL: 315-0101  
Roland Corporation U.S.  
5100 S. Eastern Avenue  
Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,  
U. S. A.  
TEL: (23) 511011  
PARAGUAY  
Distribuidora De  
Instrumentos Musicales  
J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira  
Asuncion PARAGUAY  
TEL: (595) 21 492147  
TEL: (022) 66-9426  
COLOMBIA  
Centro Musical Ltda.  
Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9  
Medellin, Colombia  
IRELAND  
Roland Ireland  
G2 Calmount Park, Calmount  
Avenue, Dublin 12  
Republic of IRELAND  
TEL: (01) 4294444  
IRAN  
MOCO INC.  
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,  
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad  
Tehran, IRAN  
TEL: (323) 890 3700  
KOREA  
TEL: (574)3812529  
Cosmos Corporation  
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,  
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA  
TEL: (02) 3486-8855  
PERU  
Audionet  
Distribuciones Musicales SAC  
Juan Fanning 530  
Miraflores  
TEL: (021) 285-4169  
ITALY  
Roland Italy S. p. A.  
Viale delle Industrie 8,  
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY  
TEL: (02) 937-78300  
ISRAEL  
Halilit P. Greenspoon & Sons  
Ltd.  
8 Retzif Ha'aliya Hashnya St.  
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL  
TEL: (03) 6823666  
MALAYSIA  
Roland Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd.  
45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39,  
Dataran Prima, 47301 Petaling  
Jaya, Selangor, MALAYSIA  
TEL: (03) 7805-3263  
Lima - Peru  
TEL: (511) 4461388  
As of April 26, 2005 (RES)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R®  
602.00.0081  
RES 464-05 Printed in Italy 06-05 KR105 OM/E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Radio Shack Speaker 40 4092 User Guide
Raritan Computer Network Hardware SX User Guide
RCA MP3 Player TH17 Series User Guide
RCA VCR VPT 385 User Guide
Roland DJ Equipment VE 20 User Guide
Roper Oven B875 User Guide
Samsung Cell Phone 08 2004 User Guide
Samsung Microwave Oven SMH5140WB BB User Guide
Samsung MP3 Player YP U7 User Guide
Sears Refrigerator 56489636 User Guide